I hereby return, to the WBO with the same story edited completely. In my time gone, I have manged to finish the Time Machine and am now posting it over here. Remember to rate and review.

Chapter 1

Spoiler (Click to View)

The Time Machine
Prologue
“Excuse me,” said a man. Most of his face was hidden by a shadow that loomed above him, forbiddingly, “I have a business offer for you and your company.”
“Is that so? And what, might I ask, gives me the pleasure of making a business deal with you? You must know that the company we call 8th Solar is no place for regular people,” answered another man. Unlike the other man, his face was clearly visible and it was one that seemed very blank and betrayed no emotion.
His nose was pointed up high as if it were making fun of the other person. His eyes were chestnut brown; emotionless and empty, yet they were so very deep as if they knew a secret that no one else knew. He shook hands with the other person. “By the way, my name is Mercury and as you probably know, I am also the President of Talent Relations.” He stared at his guest, wondering if he knew the secret of the 8th Solar. Only a select few knew it.
“I am a former worker of The Earth Astro Connection (TEAC). I was going to travel to one of Jupiter’s moons, a few months ago. But, because of a vital mistake my buffoon of a brother made, the rocket that I was supposed to ride on crashed back on Earth, after rising a few hundred miles. It’s a miracle that I’m still alive. Of course he asked for forgiveness, which he did not and never will get. I wish to take revenge and what better way to do so, than to ask help from 8th Solar?” said the Man, his face scrunched up in disgust as he thought of his brother when he was asking for forgiveness. He knew that his brother had made a genuine mistake but he could not bring himself to forgive him. His brother had forever scarred him and everybody knows that scars cannot be healed; only wounds can.
“I am sorry, but the 8th Solar does not partake in such illegal activities,” declared Mercury.
“8th Solar’s favorite planet is Jupiter,” chanted the Man. Most people would think that he had gone insane; why else would he chant such gibberish? But the Man and Mercury knew better.
This was the password that the 8th Solar used to identify people who knew the secret of the company. Upon hearing the password, Mercury’s face instantly lost its blank expression and instead showed malice, evil and craftiness. This was a real expression, not some mask used to deceive people. He now knew that this man was not here to talk with the fake 8th Solar that was a space enthusiast company, but instead was here to consult with the real 8th Solar.
“Who referred this company to you?” asked Mercury, his face now wearing a very twisted and malicious grin.
“A stranger called Giro. He learnt of my predicament and one day he came to visit me. He asked me if I wanted revenge. Of course, I gave him an affirmative answer, and so he told me the truth of the 8th Solar and gave me the password,” answered the Man, gazing at Mercury’s eyes. “His eyes were identical to yours, just as deep as if they held some great secret.”
“Now isn’t that a shocker? So Giro is actually scouting for new recruits after all,” said Mercury, legitimately shocked, although there was a hint of sarcasm in his voice, “and here I thought that he was good for nothing. I have to admit though – he has been getting more serious and maturing.”
He recalled how angry one of his men was when he woke up to find his hair dyed pink. Of course nobody had proof that Giro had done it, but Mercury knew better. A few years earlier, he had installed new air-conditioners that were actually video cameras, to keep tabs on his men and prevent any sorts of rebellions. He had seen how Giro had done it. However when the man was frustrated he had said nothing, although he did give Giro a knowing smile. Thus Giro had gotten out scotch-free. Mercury just hoped that he would not be the next target of one of their pranks.
“Of course sir,” said the Man, noticing Mercury’s faraway look.
So you want revenge?” inquired Mercury, his face lit up at the thought of another victim to kill. “There is a way but it is not very pleasant. My reliable sources indicate that your brother has abandoned TEAC and has secret plans to travel back in time via a Time Machine. He and a select group of his friends will be doing so. We have ways to travel back in time with them, if their Time Machine works. By doing so, you may kill him in a time where police doesn’t even exist. Or if you want to give him a torturous and slow death, then you can just leave him in that time.”
“You got yourself a deal. But he is still my brother, so I shall give him a quick, painless death, even if he deserves to suffer.” said The Man, after hesitating and contemplating his decision. The twosome shook hands. The Man handed Mercury a handsome amount of money and then the duo laughed in a twisted and cruel way.
Not many people knew the truth about the 8th Solar. It may be a space enthusiast company but secretly it was a company that accepted money from people in exchange for illegal business such as smuggling goods that are not legal or murdering people in a way that made it seem like a natural accident. The police had often suspected them but no proof had been provided and so they couldn’t do anything about it.
Not only had they gotten a substantial amount of money, but they had also got one fine recruit.
“So here is what we’ll do,” began Mercury, before lowering his voice…

Chapter 2

Spoiler (Click to View)

“Hey professor has the construction of your toy concluded?” asked Sarmad, sarcastically.
“Laugh it up, Sarmad, but I can tell you this much – my Time Machine will work and for the first time ever mankind will travel through time. No one has ever been reported to have been able to travel through time after all. Just you wait,” replied Boris, indignantly.
Professor Boris had been working on a tool that could take a small group of people to any time period. This Time Machine of his had taken him around five years to create. However not many people knew of this plan of Boris as the professor feared that the government might take it from him. He planned to zap himself and his friend Sarmad to the past so they could solve some of mankind’s mysteries and look at some real life dinosaurs.
Sarmad had initially declined to go back in time but when Boris had accused him of being a coward, he had been extremely angry. Boris knew that Sarmad had great pride. He also knew that mocking Sarmad was the key to convincing him to time travel, so he had reluctantly decided to provoke him into joining them.
“Oh did I hit a sore spot?” he had said with a mocking expression. Sarmad would have attacked him for accusing him of being a coward, had a few of Boris’s guards not restrained him. He had then thought of the chances that the Time Machine would work. After contemplating his decision he came to a conclusion.
The Time Machine had a low chance of actually working. Of course Boris was either ignorant of that fact, or he didn’t really care. Since Sarmad believed that it wouldn’t work, he agreed on going if the tool would actually work, the chances of which, in his mind were slim to none.
“I’ll join you if you provide lodging for my little brother if I don’t return.” Sarmad had struck a deal with Boris. Sarmad couldn’t afford any luxuries for his little brother and he knew that if he didn’t live then he would die of hunger. Thus Boris had agreed to Sarmad’s selfless deal.
Boris had been working for five years in his time machine and he believed that it would be made within three days.
Sarmad had an oval shaped face with a clear forehead that shone as bright as the day. His high and wide cheeks showed his cheerfulness that he displayed very often. The inner half of his eyebrows slanted down and they signaled his mischievous nature. He had short, blond hair but instead of the usual golden tint that blondes had, his hair was more of a bright and slightly dark yellow color.
His face was currently stretched into a big, toothy grin. Sarmad’s unique teal colored eyes were shining with amusement and laughter. He was sturdily built but he was still slightly underweight. His appearance clearly showed the appearance of a mischievous person which he lived up to. He was a bright young man however he still occasionally acted like a child, loving excitement and had a habit to sleep late at night. He was also a care free and halcyon man who didn’t have many things to worry about – except of course, at what time dinner would be served.
He was often a prankster and he enjoyed playing pranks on people such as Boris despite of the punishments he often suffered because of them. Most of his punishments revolved around food which caused his underweight. However as he was still lean and athletic, Boris chose not to feed him too much. However despite all these mishaps, he was a loyal person and the only thing he demanded in return was loyalty from his friends and anyone close to him. While usually cheerful and laidback, he could also be serious and grim, but he chose to avoid such a mood as he thought that it was rather boring.
“Good day,” acknowledged Boris’s apprentice Zack as he entered the lab.
“Is the Cyber-drive in place?” inquired Boris, not bothering to answer his assistant’s warm greeting. Zack knew that Boris couldn’t be bothered to greet, even though he didn’t have any intention of hurting anyone and so he acted as if he himself had been greeted in return.
“Yes professor,” replied Zack, nodding, “It was a cinch. It’s a good thing we found the Cyber-drive underground. Without it we would have a very low chance to survive traveling back in time.”
“That is if we do travel back in time,” contradicted Sarmad.
“Enough of your contradictory comments, Sarmad,” said Boris, his voice feigning calmness, although it was obvious that Boris was not joking around. Sarmad knew better than to answer back so he simply nodded. “Zack I have to agree with you on that one. That Cyber-drive sure made our lives much easier. Speaking of that, why did you name it ‘Cyber-drive’ and not something else?”
“Oh, I just think that it sounds cool,” said Zack. Boris shrugged at the answer.
“I’m with Zack. That name makes it sound awesome,” chimed in Sarmad. Boris shrugged again at their childish antics.
“Say Boris,” said Zack, “if we do travel back in time will we be changing history? I mean with that kind of power we could fix every single mistake we had ever made.”
“My dear Zack.” answered Boris, earnestly, “that is a very good question. I cannot be sure since I am confident that this is the first time mankind has ever travelled through time. But I believe that History shall indeed be changed but in a much different way from what you think. You see in the river of time, there are many timelines.” He began to draw a sort of river by making a few curvy lines and made a few stops in them.
“Each timeline is completely different from each other. For example, one timeline might be one in which dinosaurs are still alive during the World Wars and are being used as weapons. In another timeline, you yourself would die when you were born. Perhaps in one timeline instead of myself becoming a professor, I would become a servant – maybe Sarmad would actually have grown a brain in another timeline.” Sarmad playfully frowned at that part. “It is also possible that if we go back one day to the past, I might be in India even though yesterday I was clearly in this country. So basically we aren’t changing our timelines history but other timelines. You follow me?”
“However I am afraid that we cannot travel back in time very often as I believe that the Cyber-drive will burn itself out after a few trips or maybe even less. Although if we manage to locate other Cyber-drives underground then in might very well be possible to travel back in time to other timelines for short distances.”
“Why short distances?” questioned Zack, bewildered at all the knowledge he was gaining.
“Short distances will be better than long distances because then people could change the alternate timelines for the worst and I do not have any plans to spend the rest of my life making time machines for the general public. However I might be able to implement this on wristwatches by adding a small piece of a Cyber-drive in the core of the watch. It will indeed be difficult but in the world of Science, anything is possible. This will make it possible to go back to at most around a month ago or if we go the future, then around a year. Of course none of that is possible until we test our own little Time Machine.”
Zack blushed, thinking that he had just asked a rather dumb question. He mentally slapped himself for showing weakness in front of the good professor. To his surprise Boris reassuringly put his arm around him.
“It was not a dumb question,” he said, knowing what Zack was thinking. “It was a legitimate question that not many people would think to ask as most of them are usually very ignorant.”
“Say, Professor, you aren’t telepathic now by any chance, are you? I was about to comfort him myself?” said Sarmad, jokingly.
“Do I look telepathic? How do you think I could possibly learn such a thing? Although maybe if I add a mental chip in everybody’s mind and connect them via Wi-Fi then maybe…” trailed off Boris, seriously, not realizing that Sarmad was joking. Sarmad knew that now that Boris was in his world of scientific mumbo-jumbo, he would not be brought back to reality for a few minutes at least.
Zack simply stared at him and began to wonder how Boris had created a Time Machine if he couldn’t tell the difference between a joke and a genuine question. He was tempted to laugh, but he managed to curb that feeling.
“Say Boris, if we do not make it back in time, which I am sure of, what will happen to us?” asked Sarmad, interested. Although he would never admit it he was very excited about this trip and half of him believed that he would indeed travel back in time.
“Well either we will end in any random time period whether it be in the future or past or we’ll be pulverized the instant we attempt to travel back in time,” said Boris, simply. If he was frightened by the fact that he was about to travel back in time and risk his life, he certainly didn’t show it or he didn’t realize that his life will be in grave danger.
“But worse than that,” he added, in a serious tone “I would have to do my calculations all over again.”
Sarmad and Zack both giggled at what they thought to be the professor’s sense of humor. But when they looked at Boris, his face clearly showed them that he was dead serious. They looked at each other and burst into laughter at the confused man’s lack of common sense. Despite being very smart when it came to scientific terms, Boris could sometimes be very absentminded.
“One last question,” said Sarmad knowing that Boris was not in the least angry, “explain to me in simple words how exactly can we travel back in time? I mean it simply defies the laws of Science.”
Boris stared at Sarmad as if he had grown an extra limb.
“Sarmad is actually asking a decent question? Goodness me, miracles never cease to amaze us all,” he muttered, under his breath with a sigh. Sarmad heard those words but he chose to ignore Boris’s playful teasing. “As for your question, you see the Cyber-drive that I have discovered contains a special substance that is very dangerous and if misused could potentially destroy this whole planet. But I have redirected the energy output and instead of releasing it all out which will inevitability cause mass destruction, it will instead slowly release it and focus it all on one atom. That atom will expand to the size of my Time Machine.”
“The energy output will be too much for the matter to handle and it will either explode lightly which will cause scores and scores of minor tremors on the Earth, which will not cause any damage” went on the rather mad professor, “or it will simply tear itself from the fabric of time and space and create a portal which shall defy the rules of time and space. The portal shall not be activated for very long and in that short period, we must enter the Time Machine and then go to the time period we desire. Understood?”
“In bits and pieces,” answered Sarmad, “you kind of went into the advanced scientific mumbo-jumbo that I’ll never understand.”
“Now excuse me I will retire,” said Boris with an angry huff at the fact that Sarmad didn’t understand half of what he said, “but before that I would like to inform you that Leo will be joining us in our adventurous adventure.”
“Why the heck is Leo coming?” wondered Sarmad, aloud. His question was left unanswered as Boris began to leave.
Leo, the silent, lone wolf would be joining them for the trip. He and Sarmad were rivals but competed over only a small amount of things. But when they did compete over that small amount, they did not stop and would not quit until one gave up. Sarmad grinned after realizing that he could tease Leo as much as he wished and he would not mind nor would he insult him back. He knew Leo could not be bothered to insult him back. He would probably just roll his eyes and walk away or maybe tell him to be quiet but he would never send an insult back or attack him physically.
“Could I ask one last question, professor?” called Zack before Boris could leave.
“One last,” sighed Boris.
“Suppose the future of the timeline we land into is very grim, will our presence affect the future of that timeline?” asked Zack.
“Yes it will,” said Boris, “even if we do nothing but sit idly, the timeline shall change. For example, if you throw a rock into a river, the river’s path will have changed and it will never return to its original form. The more rocks there, the more the path will change. Even if the rocks stay in one place in the river, they will still affect the path, would they not?”
“Yes they will,” said Zack.
“That river is a timeline,” explained Boris, “and we are the rocks. Each of us is one of the rocks. The more people that travel back the more the timeline shall change. And even if we leave, the timeline shall never be the same. You follow me?”
“Thanks Boris,” mumbled Zack, in his own world of Science. Boris left to sleep and Sarmad left as well, knowing that Zack would be no fun right now as he was deep in thought.

Chapter 3

Spoiler (Click to View)

Meanwhile, a few hundred miles away
“So is everything ready, Mercury?” asked one person, of the large group of men.
“Yes indeed, Giro,” answered Mercury. “It’s nice to see that you are working very hard lately, which is more than I can say for some people.” He gave a sharp glance to one of the other men.
The man flinched. Mercury’s occasional temper tantrums were well known in the 8th Solar. Mercury inwardly grinned. It was nice to see how much his men feared him. He rather liked the fact that he was feared by such a large number of people. It made him imagine that those men were beneath him and all of them were nothing more than pathetic tools to be used to fulfill one’s wishes. The few people who were not frightened of him at all, included Giro and some other men.
“All right then. Buckle up men and don’t act like sissies, no matter what. Remember we all have our own and the 8th Solar’s honor to defend. Whoever does not get ready will be left behind to rot. We shall leave in a few days,” announced the President of 8th Solar who had just entered the hangar. Unlike Mercury, the president considered everyone as equals however he was actually a mere puppet of Mercury who was secretly calling the shots. The president didn’t do anything as he knew that his men were more loyal to Mercury than to him despite of the fact he treated them as equals.
Everyone immediately rose and began to finish their last minute problems, before they left. Each of them knew that there was a chance that they would not return from their trip.
But one man was not afraid at all. He was the man who had visited Mercury four years earlier and was now ready for his revenge. His brother would regret ever putting sights on him when he would be groveling at his feet. The man grinned at the thought.
Two days passed
“Hey Boris,” called Sarmad, from the hangar.
“What is it?” said Boris.
“Friend for you,” answered Sarmad.
“Who is it?” questioned Boris.
“I didn’t bother to ask.”
“Tell him to stay outside the house. I just need to connect this wire. I’m coming, I’m coming. Gosh.”
“Okay,” replied Sarmad.
Boris hurried to his door after putting a cloth over his rather large Time Machine. As he came to the door he noticed that it was already opened and Sarmad was talking to a middle aged man about the moon and other things related to space.
The moment his eyes fell on the stranger, he tensed. Sarmad noticed this but let it slide. But when he was about to leave, he saw something he had never seen before. Boris’s eyes had an expression that was foreign to them – they were filled with a burning fury and hate. If someone just happened to look at Boris, they would notice nothing at all, but Sarmad who had known Boris for so long, could see the hatred and fury. He could tell that his friend was having hateful thoughts. But if he looked deeper inside, he would see something else – a hidden sorrow and gloominess. Boris was now trembling, but not because of fear or cold, but because of exasperation and acrimony. The two people must have some personal issues that they must settle right now, before Boris blows the stack.
“Excuse us Sarmad,” said the stranger to him. He nodded and went to talk to Leo, hoping that he would talk for once.
“You!” said Boris, angrily, realizing who this man was.
“Oh come on Boris,” said the stranger, “you didn’t think I would let you off the hook at easy, did you?
“For the last time I have no interest in rejoining The Earth Astro Connection (TEAC),” said Boris, raising his voice. “Because of you I haven’t seen my brother in many years. Now get your filthy feet of my garden. If you throw a truck of dirt, in it, it will still remain cleaner than what will happen if you keep on standing on it for a while.” Boris smirked at the look on his uninvited guest’s face. It was simply priceless.
“How dare you?” shouted the stranger, angrily. “I am your former boss. Besides it was your mistake that almost killed him. Although I wish he would have died. It would have saved me the hassle of going into court. You managed to get off easy but I didn’t. ”
“Not my problem, the past is the past. Besides you are my former boss not current,” replied Boris, emphasizing on the word ‘former.’
“Silence!” shouted the stranger, his voice as loud as a microphone, if not louder.
“Silence yourself, you blubbering buffoon. Your loud voice might make me lose my hearing,” retorted Boris.
“You sure have grown a backbone over the past few years, my dear Boris,” said the man, lowering his voice, which now had a mocking sound.
“Don’t I feel loved,” said Boris, returning the mocking expression that Ron was sending him.
“Believe me I don’t like you at all,” said Ron, “my boss sent me here to get you and if I don’t then he’ll fire me. Believe me when I tell you, Boris, I do not like you as a co-worker let alone friend. In fact I can easily say that I hate you and that I don’t regret feeling hatred for you.”
“The feeling is mutual,” said Boris.
“I cannot explain the anger I feel at you. Not only are you well off in your nice home, but you also didn’t get into trouble with the judge at court,” complained Ron.
“Are you finished?” asked Boris, “Face it. I got off easy because even though I had made one mistake I had already done many scientific miracles which you could only dream of. While I was working day and night, you were having a cup of coffee, scolding me just for the heck of it and taking credit for all the work I had done. When I proved this to the judge, I got off without a hassle.”
“You never deserved the high position of TEAC and fortunately you were removed and now you are back as a not-so-famous man trying to bring me back to that company for your own selfish gain. Now my dear, Ron, please leave before I call the police to escort you out of my house.”
The man known as Ron shook his fist angrily, after realizing that Boris had no intention of rejoining TEAC. He looked as if he were about to blow up, but instead he took out a pistol and aimed at Boris’s heart threateningly.
Boris’s eyes looked as if they were about to come out of their sockets. Ron had seriously lost his mind. While he was not the best of people, he would never, ever threaten to kill somebody. Ron grinned and then suddenly started laughing maniacally. Boris knew what had just happened – Ron had gone mad. Ron grinned madly at him and giggled uncontrollably. However they were not pleasant giggles, they were ones that indicated that the man had lost it. Then, suddenly Ron did the unthinkable.
Instead of shooting Boris, he aimed his gun at his own heart.
“Don’t do it, you fool,” yelled Boris, as he reached out to prevent Ron from doing the unimaginable. Too late – Ron had pulled the trigger. But instead of a bullet emerging from it, something else came.
A small amount of oil had come out of the gun and flung itself upon Ron. Ron’s face was showing a mix of emotions. It showed shock, anger, hate, confusion and then again shock.
“Drat. I knew something smelled fishy, when that brat of a child was running a gun’s store. I should have known that it was a prank. And I paid good money for it, too,” muttered Ron.
Had he not been so distracted, he would have noticed and blocked the blow that came from Boris. But alas, that were not to be and Ron instantly lost consciousness.
“Even at this age, I pack quite a wallop, don’t you think, Ron,” said Boris, smiling down at the unconscious body.
Boris went back inside, showing the victory sign and grinning to himself.
“Boris we’re ready,” said Zack. He dropped his hammer in surprise when he heard Boris give a loud guffaw. The hammer fell on his toes and he yelled loudly in pain. Instead of helping him, Boris snickered and asked him to call his fellow time travelers.
However Zack did not need to as both Sarmad and Leo chose that moment to enter the room as they saw Zack treating his toe, Sarmad snickered however Leo’s face remained blank.
Leo had long, smooth black hair and thick eyebrows that seemed as if they were brooding just like their owner. His icy blue eyes were deep as if they were a pool of deep water yet they were so very emotionless and cold. His eyes were such so he could hide whatever he felt from his companions. They clearly showed that he did not want nor did he need friends, but other than that, they were completely blank, without an expression.
One look at him would make anyone looking for a fight think twice. He was taller than most people and also well-built and athletic. He was an expert of archery, soccer and many other sports.
“Why’d you laugh? I mean before the hammer fell on me,” inquired Zack.
“Oh I’d just won an argument with old Ron outside,” said Boris, beginning to laugh as he remembered the look on Ron’s face when the spill of oil had soaked him, “he and I go way back. But then again, we aren’t the best of friends. Please excuse me; I need to go the police station now to give them the body of my dear Ron,” Zack wondered what had happened, but didn’t say anything, instead he just shrugged as if they were talking about the weather.
A few hours later, Boris had gone to a nearby police station and told them about Ron and his actions. They had said that he would probably go to jail for threatening a fellow citizen and intention of buying a weapon without proper authorization.
“Ron shouldn’t have bought a weapon,” the sergeant had said, “he already had a shady past and he was simply adding fuel to the fire.” Boris had agreed and soon left for his house.

Chapter 4 (Pretty long chapter.)

Spoiler (Click to View)

Finally the time came.
Everyone had finally finished their last minute preparations and they all were ready to leave behind everything they had worked so hard to achieve. The chance of their survival was as slim as the chance of an unpredicted solar eclipse.
Out of all the people Boris knew, only one knew of their trip to the past – he was Boris’s best friend, Max.
“Good luck, Boris old chum,” said Max, who was visiting so that he could be with his friend who potentially might die.
“Thanks Max,” said Boris.
“No problem Bor,” replied Max, his voice calm. Boris grinned at Max’s use of his old nickname. He knew that Max did it because Boris himself hated the name in the beginning but he had gotten used to it and Max just did it for old time’s sake.
“Whatever you say, Maxie,” teased Boris, playfully. Max pretended to be hurt. He gave a fake, sad frown.
“My name is Max,” he pouted.
“Later Maxie,” said Boris, putting out his hand. Max without hesitating shook it. Max tried to look laidback but inside he was tearing apart. This might be the last time he sees his best friend. Max had helped Boris when they were children by supporting him when the teacher falsely accused him of cheating in an assessment. Since then the two helped each other and were practically inseparable. Where one went, the other went as well. Of course with the exception of this Time Machine trip.
Max couldn’t come as he had a family to take care of and was not very rich and thus couldn’t afford to take a vacation from his job. Boris had offered him money but he had refused as he was a very proud person and did not want charity.
“Fare thee well,” said Max in an English accent. He began to take his leave.
“And my name is Max,” he shouted from the exit comically. Boris giggled a bit before making sure everyone was ready for their trip.
Leo watched Boris and his friend’s exchange observantly. It had been years since he had a friend to lean on and bicker with. Could he get one too?
‘No,’ thought Leo, ‘the human race is an ungrateful race and I don’t need such ungrateful people.
But could he get one?
His friendly side and cold side argued inside of him. It was a huge conflict. He desired to have a friend but could he trust them. They had proven in the past that they were an ungrateful sort of people that only used a person for their own benefit. Leo growled and he unconsciously punched something in his frustration. To his utmost surprise it was Boris who was lying flat on the ground.
“Sorry,” apologized Leo shortly, helping Boris up but then ignoring him.
“I just came to tell you that it’s time,” shrugged Boris. Leo grunted and joined everyone on a platform.
Their faces were all solemn and quiet. Even the usually garrulous Sarmad was sound as he gave a silent prayer for their safety. Zack was ready for anything. All he needed for the trip were his mathematical papers and food. Leo remained quiet, his face hiding whatever he was feeling. Boris simply remained sound and his mind was going through the possibilities of what might happen in the past.
“Shall we leave?” finally asked Sarmad, his voice not betraying fear or any such emotion.
“Isn’t it obvious? No. Did you hit your head or something?” said Boris, providing comic-relief from the suspense.
Sarmad huffed but said nothing. To Boris the most common of questions could be taken as if the question was the end of the world.
“If we depart over here the rip in the fabric of time and space which we shall possibly and probably create, might destroy my house and anything else within a hundred miles radius. Before you ask, we need to go to an open space where there is no life for a hundred square miles. I refuse to let even the tiniest of creatures die because I was too careless. Even ants have life and deserve to live unless they get annoying.”
Then under his breath he muttered, “I’ll make you proud of me, brother.” Not even Sarmad’s sharp ears could catch those words that meant so much to Boris.
Zack nodded and pushed a button on the Time Machine to revert it to a cube. Then he took out a similar object except it was in the shape of a sphere, and pushed a button on it to enlarge it. In an instant a small helicopter was in sight.
The quartet boarded the vehicle and took off. Being the expert he was, Boris was the one chosen to fly the vehicle.
Sarmad was feeling bored after a while on the helicopter. He eyed two cuboids in a corner. A light bulb lit over his head as he began to send a number of signals to Zack when Boris wasn’t looking and the former nodded. Leo simply ignored the troublesome duo. Sarmad held the couple of small cubes in his hand. He pressed a small button on each of them and with a small puff of smoke; they enlarged and took the shape of a couple of parachutes. He handed one to Zack who strapped himself just like Sarmad had.
“Say Boris,” said Zack upon receiving a whisper that was too loud for their own good although they did not notice how loud it was from Sarmad. They did not know that Boris had heard the whisper and knew that they were probably considering some kind of mischief.
“Yes? What is it Zack? Before you speak I hope that you two aren’t planning mischief,” said Boris, without turning around. Leo gave an amused smirk while Sarmad and Zack exchanged guilty looks.
“N-Never mind,” stammered Sarmad. Zack gave him a very angry look. The look made Sarmad regain his confidence, knowing that any punishment that the good professor could come up with was worth annoying the Boris and so, after a few minutes of consideration, he smiled. Zack relaxed knowing that they were about to have some fun.
“Enjoy the ride,” shouted Sarmad, before jumping out of the helicopter followed by Zack. Boris realized what had just transpired and he quickly put the copter on autopilot before he went to see if they were sensible enough to wear parachutes. Fortunately they had and he could see them slowly descending.
“Those idiots,” he muttered, “Leo, let’s go see if they’re okay.” Unfortunately the moment he turned around, he saw Leo about to jump with a parachute himself.
“You want to jump first, Professor?” he said with a grin.
“I’m surrounded by children,” he said shaking his head. He was about to jump, when Leo stopped him.
“What?” he asked.
“Once again you’re so absentminded that you forgot to wear your parachute,” commented Leo, shaking his head.
Boris blushed and strapped himself to the parachute before jumping off the plane, screaming as he did so. Leo pressed a button on the copter before he jumped. As he was slowly descending a sphere fell from the sky and he grabbed it. Thankfully he had been sensible enough to reform the copter back to its sphere form.
He landed to see Sarmad and Zack looking guilty like schoolboys who forgot their homework, and Boris shouting at them like a teacher.
Tired of Boris chewing them out every time they did something exciting, Zack shot Boris an insult and quickly covered his mouth after realizing what he had done. Everyone was quiet for a moment and it seemed that even the birds had stopped chirping. Leo gave both Sarmad and Zack a sympathetic look. Boris then erupted in fury, first shouting at Zack then at Sarmad for not saying anything. Even Leo got shouted at for a reason he had no idea of.
“You want us to get deaf or something?” inquired Sarmad, sarcastically.
“Yeah we’re adults, not children. So what if we’re slightly immature, we’re still adults and you have no right to scold us. We don’t need you to make us think that we’re at kindergarten. I’m pretty sure that we’ll live a much healthier life if you don’t yell at us so often,” said Zack, holding up his hands in defense.
Boris was silent for a few minutes, wondering if what the two had said was true. His eyes had bulged when they had said this. Did he really annoy them that much that they felt like they were children?
But after thinking for a few minutes, Boris realized that the duo really acted like children and so he had full right to make them know their place and because of this, he began to yell at them again except this time he yelled much louder than he initially had. His theory had gone down the drain and he felt no remorse nor did he feel regret in shouting at them. Both Zack and Sarmad regretted jumping out of the helicopter and initiating Boris’s annoying and boring lecture.
Just before the two could be chewed out more and possibly go deaf, Leo had intervened and convinced Boris to forgive them. Both of them shot Leo a gracious glance which was received by an icy blue glare.
Thus, they once again departed on the helicopter, with the threat that if anyone attempted any sort of mischief they would have no dessert or anything decent to eat. In addition they would have to sleep on the couch. Both Sarmad and Zack pouted. If anything could keep those two in line, it was food or sleeping problems.
Zack was pretending to sulk, hoping that Boris might feel sorry for him but it was to no avail. Boris knew of Sarmad and Zack’s bag of tricks. Sarmad was teasing Leo but soon realized that while he had thought that it would be fun to tease him without any response, it was actually quite boring. He tried to convince Leo to open up a bit.
“Leo, why don’t you let us be friends with you and open up a bit?” pleaded Sarmad.
“Why should I? All friends do is hurt you. By trusting ‘friends’ you are putting your life in their hands. They will betray you and die. They will leave you without looking back,” said Leo, his eyes so bright that it seemed as if they were glowing. “They will kill you if they have to, without a second thought. They will escape when you need them. But I don’t need them. All my, so called, friends, have done nothing but betray me.”
Leo put a hand on one of his eyes and was shocked to see a single, silver tear seep down his fingers and on to the platform of the helicopter.
“Leo,” said Sarmad, gently as if talking to a wounded puppy, “not everyone is like that.”
“Is that a fact?” said Leo, raising his voice slightly. “I trusted friends again and again, but every time I opened up, I regretted it. In the end I was betrayed by them. Someone showed me kindness only to betray me when they had finished using me like an object. I refuse to be used by such people and I refuse to believe in these petty and pathetic things you call emotions. I was dying but instead of helping me, my friends ran away to save themselves, even though I gave my heart and soul in protecting them.”
Sarmad was stunned; surely Leo’s childhood wasn’t anything like this. He wasn’t sure if he should ask Leo to open up or not if he was that insecure. After some pondering Sarmad came to a conclusion; he would give Leo a true friend no matter what the cost.
“No one can live alone. Many friends are often using you to get what they want. But like I said not everyone is like that. Some people just want to help you and watch the world blossom,” he insisted, “it’s true that you may be scarred by a friend, but scars do heal.”
“Scars don’t heal,” declared Leo, “wounds do.”
“Then what do scars, do? They fade, I guess,” said Sarmad, comically.
“No they don’t. They stay where they are, forever to remind you what friendship can do to you,” said Leo, quietly.
“Leo, it’s common for a person to befriend, know, use, and then betray another person but not all people are like that. I’ll tell you again, some people just want to see the world blossom,” said Sarmad. “Carve your own destiny, Leo. Forget the traitors who scarred you. Let me tell you something, friend – Only a friend can heal a scar if you think that they do not fade or heal by time. Only a friend can prove that friendship is something more important than life itself. I’d rather lose my life, than to betray my friends.”
With that, Sarmad went to ask Boris the time, leaving a stunned Leo behind. How could such wisdom come out of a mouth that usually spoke nothing but trash? He was surprised by how wise and philosophical his usually silly friend had sounded.
Sarmad’s words continuously rang in his head.
‘Only a friend can heal a scar.’ Why couldn’t he get those words out of his head? They kept on repeating themselves in his head.
Leo began to feel that he was going insane or mad. He kept hearing Sarmad’s voice even though right now he was clearly engaged in a verbal barb with Zack until Boris had roared for them to cut it out.
Now all was quiet and Leo could clearly think although a familiar voice still rang in his mind occasionally. Was there actually some truth in Sarmad’s words? Could he actually bring himself to make trustworthy friends like Sarmad? And had he actually shed a tear? Leo had never shed a tear since as long as he could remember. But then Leo shook himself. Friends were useless and cruel. He stayed still as a memory stirred inside his mind.
*Flashback*
A boy of ten is sitting on a swing, weeping silently. The sun is setting and the night is approaching but the child stays still. He hears shouts and calls of a group of friends going home in the distance. This only caused him to weep more. Why couldn’t he have friends? Why did everyone walk away just like that?
He shuts his eyes, as his sadness turns into anger. If he couldn’t have friends, then no one should. He is about to go and attack the children in the distance when a garrulous and talkative looking boy with blazing but kind red eyes and fiery red hair comes in view.
“Hey, what are you doing by your lonesome out here, bro?” said the boy. “My name’s Jaguar by the way.” The boy on the swings opened his eyes. Here, a child he just met is treating him like a friend. “I saw what happened with you and those bullies. Don’t mind them; they’re just conceited teenagers who think that only people who are strong and capable can join their gang.”
“But you seem to be a strong person,” said the boy on the swing, his tears beginning to slow down but his voice was not as steady as it usually was “Why don’t you join them?”
“They’re bullies who only pick on someone who aren’t half as powerful as they themselves are,” said Jaguar, in a slightly indignant manner, “my ideals don’t agree with them. A true fighter, fights with only those who have the strength to defend themselves. Say, since you’re so lonely, why don’t we be friends? What’s your name?”
“You really mean that you’ll be a real friend?” said the boy on the swing, drying his tears. He was answered with a nod. “My name’s Leo.”
“All right Leo. That’s a nice name. Say, why don’t you come over to my place right now,” suggested Jaguar, looking up at the cloudy sky. “Besides it seems as if it might rain tonight.” Leo smiled through the few tears that remained and nodded gladly. He would hate to go home to his father right now. He would probably be worried but Leo had no doubt that Jaguar had a phone by which he could call him.
“Thanks, Jaguar,” said Leo, as he jumped off the swing and landed gracefully.
“Say you got some talent, kid,” said Jaguar, looking at the amazing jump his friend had made, “how about, I teach you some martial arts, you like that idea?” Leo stared at Jaguar, as if he had grown an extra head. Him – learn Martial Arts? That would be the wildest dream he could imagine, but he liked it and nodded his head vigorously.
With that the two friends were off with their new found friendship.
*End Flashback*
Leo smiled as he remembered the memory, but then he frowned as he remembered the aftermath to that friendship.
*Flashback*
Two teenagers of fifteen are playing soccer. They fail to notice a shadow looming about, as night falls and the day flees.
“Come on Leo, you can do better than that,” shouts one of the boys, his fiery red hair blowing here and there. He dribbles the ball towards the goal ready to shoot it.
“You asked for it, Jaguar,” says another of the boys. He speeds up and prevents the ball from reaching his goal. He takes a few brief seconds to think of a strategy and then dribbles the ball at a decent speed.
Jaguar reaches to intercept Leo’s course but the latter expecting it, led the ball away from Jaguar and before anything could happen, had shot it at the goal. He gave a victory cry and jumped with delight. Jaguar puts his head down in sadness but quickly raises it with a determined look on his face.
“You got lucky, bro,” he said.
“Sure, sure, whatever you say,” answered Leo sarcastically.
“I’m afraid game time is over, children,” says a man, approaching the ground, with a rather evil smile that looked very eerie. His white hair stretched down his waist and further.
“Who are you?” asked Leo, suspiciously.
“I’m a man who is about to take you away, children,” answers the man, with a twisted laugh. The two teenagers jump with surprise and take on self defense stances. They now realize that the man plans to kidnap them.
“Stay back, Jaguar, I have a plan,” whispers Leo, “I can’t see a weapon on him but he seems very skilled in martial arts and is emitting a frightening aura. I’ll pin him and you get a stick or something to attack this man with. Although I’ll call you if he’s too good for me.” Jaguar nodded, fear-stricken but he knew what he must do to survive.
Leo charged forward as the man failed to make a move, other than smile with malice. Then he slowly raised his hand from his pocket to reveal a revolver. Leo stops filled with fear. He was now defenseless.
No! He could not think that way. He must stay strong otherwise Jaguar would panic.
“Do not move, child,” says the man, wickedly.
“I’m not afraid to die,” says Leo, bravely, “do your worst, you monster.”
“I know that you’re not afraid to die,” says the man with another eerie smile. “But surely, you care for your friend?” The man points his weapon at Jaguar. “Come with me or else.”
“You wouldn’t,” says Leo, unsure. He was not scared of dying, but he feared for his friend’s safety, he knew that Jaguar was afraid of death.
“Would I?” answers the man, he puts his finger on the trigger. Jaguar walks forward so he is standing next to Leo.
“Leo, let’s just go with him. I don’t want to die,” he says, nervously.
“Too late,” says the man with a sadistic grin as he pulls the trigger.
Jaguar braced himself for the pain and shut his eyes. He heard the bang but he felt no pain. He opens his eyes, only to see Leo lying right before him on the ground, his shoulder bleeding profusely. He flinches at the sight of so much blood.
“I will never understand these emotions. Why give your own life for a friend? I for one would save myself,” said the man, to nobody in particular, “but it will not matter, I’ll kill your friend, now. Wait a minute; it seems that you are still alive, boy.” He looked at the barely alive Leo, “Now watch as your friend dies right before your very eyes.” He gave a sadistic laugh and closed in on Jaguar.
“Help me, Jaguar,” says Leo, in a low, whispery tone, ignoring the man. Jaguar stares at him, then at the armed man who grew closer and closer and then at the stick he himself held.
He drops his weapon and backs away slowly, before turning around and running away.
Leo simply gazed at him in dismay. How could Jaguar do this to him? He felt betrayed – angered – furious, among other feelings. He also felt an amount of sorrow but they were overpowered by hatred. He felt pain, regret and hate. His innocent eyes shut to make sure he wasn’t imagining things and when they opened, they were different. They were hollow and icy. Their former innocent blue was now a cool, cold and unfriendly color. Once again a friend had betrayed him. He remembered that faithful night when the two had become ‘friends’ but now that night was molded with pain and suffering.
The man cackled with glee as he noticed the pain Leo was feeling right now – both emotional and physical. He raised his arm to shoot Leo again. Keeping Leo alive was too risky. He was a reckless kid and might give him away if he were to be taken. He was about to shoot him when an unimaginable amount of pain strikes his arm. He looks at it and notices a bruise but more importantly, a lack of a gun.
He turns around to see a man, holding his gun. Behind him is a squad of armed and grim policemen. The man leading them is an elderly man with a white beard. His eyes were just like Leo’s – cold and icy.
“Leave my son alone,” shouts the Elderly man, as he signals a few of the policemen, “take him away boys.”
The policemen step forward and the man cowers in fear – he didn’t want to go to jail – this wasn’t supposed to happen – he was supposed to win this. He dared not struggle with the policemen – he knew he would be charged with more than a kidnapping attempt if he did so and a short stay at jail was much better than a long one.
Leo’s father noticed the wounded Leo. His eyes softened at the sight of his son but they shone with concern when he noticed his son’s icy blue orbs.
What could possibly traumatize his son so much that he had changed so much? Leo got up with pain, but he refused to show it. He glared at his father, who was taken-aback by the look of betrayal in his eyes. Leo then glared at the man who had tried to kidnap him. He was wearing handcuffs but was walking peacefully.
He looked at the teenager and let out the most twisted cackle Leo had ever heard. He stopped his laughing for a few moments.
“You think that you have felt pain, boy? The pain of betrayal is nothing compared to the pain you are going to feel when I’m through with you. My name is Jupiter and that is a name that will haunt you for the rest of your days. See you in hell, boy. Or maybe if you survive long enough in this harsh world, then I’ll personally send you to hell,” said the man who had declared himself as Jupiter. He let out another snicker, before the policemen pushed him roughly into a van.
“I’ll be waiting for you, Jupiter,” said Leo under his breath, “and I’ll have my own revenge.”
Once he said that he left to confront his treacherous former friend Jaguar, leaving his distressed father in the rain.
“Go home, father,” said Leo, as he began to take his leave, “I’ll come home in a few hours. I need time to think.”
*End Flashback*
Jupiter’s laughter had forever been remembered by Leo, and he continuously waited for Jupiter to return and try to attack him. Back then, he was a helpless child, but now he was a powerful man.
Leo’s face scrunched up in disgust as he remembered the events that had followed.
*Flashback*
“How could you do this to me, Jaguar?” shouted Leo, in anger. “I thought that you were a friend.”
“I’m sorry, Leo,” answered Jaguar with a whimper.
“Look at this,” said Leo, pointing at his bandaged shoulder. “I selflessly took a bullet for you and how do you repay me? You selfishly walk away when I need you the most. I actually thought that you would be a real friend to me.”
“Look, I said I’m sorry, what else do you want me to do?” pleaded Jaguar. The unsuspecting boy received a powerful punch in the face and he fell down in pain.
“You deserved that Jaguar,” said Leo, in disgust. Jaguar put his hand on his face, in shock. He had never thought, even in his wildest dreams that Leo would strike him. His shock quickly turned into rage. He knew that he had made a mistake, but for Leo to strike him?
“That was uncalled for, Leo,” said Jaguar as he slowly got up. “How could you?”
“You deserved that and much more,” said Leo. He gave another blow to his former friend, who doubled over in pain.
“Enough of this nonsense!” shouted Jaguar as he rose, “I made a mistake; you know how much I fear death. I had to save myself. This isn’t some dramatic movie in which I stay with you and we die together. This is reality, Leo.”
“I know that its reality. But when I saved you, I expected that you would repay the favor. Be happy that I’m leaving you in one piece,” said Leo in a quiet voice as he turned to leave.
“I’m sorry, Leo,” said Jaguar, his voice barely above a whisper.
“So am I, Jaguar. You betrayed me. No one will ever break the wall that shall cover me from everybody from today onwards,” declared Leo. “I am me, and I don’t need friends anymore. Everyone who claimed to be a friend simply abused my trust until today. No one will abuse me again; No one shall think of me as an object to be used. I am Leo and I’m a person.”
“I will gain your trust again somehow, someway,” said Jaguar determinedly.
“Try it Jaguar. You won’t succeed,” said Leo.
“You just wait, Leo,” declared Jaguar.
“Silence you fool! I am sick of your constant whining and empty promises. You will never be as close to me as you were before this mess,” said Leo.
With that, Leo walked away, knowing that nobody will use him again. He was a person who would not be abused by ungrateful humans. He would live with and trust only one person – his father.
“Leo!” called Jaguar, as Leo continued to walk away, not even waving goodbye. “Leo!”
*End Flashback*
“Leo,” pestered Sarmad.
“What is it?” said Leo, suddenly remembering where he was. He was so absorbed in his memory that he hadn’t heard Sarmad who continued to attempt a conversation with him.
“I was asking you, whether or not you’re going to take those to the past,” answered Sarmad, pointing to a couple of twin Sabers. Leo frowned as he looked at them – those sabers were one of the few memories he had of his late father. Leo’s eyes widened as he unknowingly nodded to Sarmad and his mind sub-consciously triggered another memory of Leo’s rather interesting past.
*Flashback*
16 year old Leo ran home, his usually cold blue eyes clearly showed concern and fear. He had already lost so much, he didn’t want to lose the one person he cared so much about – he didn’t want to lose his father.
When the messenger had interrupted Leo’s archery practice, he had been furious. But when the messenger explained his father’s state, Leo had dropped his bow and arrow and began to run home.
Leo continued to run. He looked at the sky to notice that the sky that was usually the color of his eyes was now grey and cloudy.
Before Leo knew it, rain pelted on him and trickled down his body. Passersby, stopped to look at the poor boy as he ran faster than a boy was expected to run. They noticed water running down from his eyes – surely those were not tears. Leo had a well known reputation across town for being a child who never cried ever since an incident that not many people knew about. But alas they were tears. Leo’s fear of losing his father was too much for him and his tears freely ran down. But most people who saw them brushed the idea away, believing that they were just raindrops that by chance reached the boy’s eyes.
Leo’s head perked up in hope, as his house gradually came in view. Perhaps his father would be alive and well after all and there was nothing to worry about. A scowl slowly made its way on his face as he remembered how frantic the messenger had been. He made a mental note to teach that messenger a lesson if his father was actually all right. He was well known for having the ability to beat people three times his age in a clean fight.
Leo was in the process of calming down, when suddenly he felt sad. He didn’t know how or why he was feeling so but he felt as if a piece of his heart had suddenly been ripped out. Realizing that this might have something to do with his father, Leo doubled his speed and finally reached his home. He kicked the door with great strength, breaking it off its hinges. He came face to face with the most important person in his life in be wearing a weak smile.
“Father!” exclaimed Leo in alarm.
“Leo, my son,” said Leo’s Father in a weak tone.
“Father what is wrong?” demanded Leo, although he spoke in a gentle manner. Leo’s father hesitated. Should he tell Leo the truth? Should he tell Leo what the poor and unfortunate boy’s life was about to become?
He would.
“My son, it seems that I have encountered an unnamed fatal and new virus that slowly but surely blocks the blood supply that goes to the brain. It seems that out of thirty people who have encountered this virus, none have survived,” explained Leo’s Father, weakly. Leo was shocked. Of all the billions of people in the world, the virus had to pick his father.
“Father, please. Father, please don’t leave me in this cruel world alone,” he begged, deciding to swallow his pride.
“I’m sorry, child,” said a man in a sad tone.
It was then that Leo noticed the small crowd that was near him. The person who had spoken to him was the doctor. Excluding him, there were a few more people. There was a young nurse, whose head was put low in a mournful manner. Apparently this was her first job as a nurse and she felt that if she could think of a brainwave then her patient might miraculously survive. There was a young boy who resembled Leo slightly. There was also a man in a suit who seemed to be a lawyer. In addition there was a man whose head was low as if he were feeling sad but Leo felt uneasy around him. Leo didn’t know how but he felt some sort of deception from him as if he reeked of malicious intentions. He had an eerie aura that surrounded him and looked on mockingly as if daring someone to come forth.
“My son,” whispered Leo’s Father, as he struggled to hold on and breathe and fight the clutches of death and live for a little while longer. “I want you to know that you are the best son a man can ask for. Leo, my son, I am proud of you – as proud as a peacock. My son, thank you for making me so happy and adding meaning to my life. Once again, I will tell you – I am proud of you my son.”
The elderly man’s breathing grew scarce and finally stopped. The man stopped moving and lied still. If one would look from the distance it would seem that he was asleep but Leo knew better.
His father was gone.
The boy simply sat still. It was as if a part of him was ripped off and torn into shreds. His father – the one person who truly cared for him was gone. In his head he could constantly hear a heart monitor beeping monotonously. Leo felt empty, hollow and upset. For some reason he had the sudden urge to go and attack the man who was emitting the eerie aura but he managed to curb it.
‘Why him,’ was constantly going through his mind. What had he done to deserve this? His father was the only person who understood him since the fateful day when Jaguar had betrayed him. Why was Leo’s life such a curse? Was he destined to live in such a life? Was there any reason to continue his life?
The man wearing a suit made a throat clearing noise and everyone turned to him.
“Leo you will be adopted by your uncle Hades here,” said the Lawyer wearing a suit. The man who scared Leo stepped forward and put a hand on Leo’s shoulder as if to reassure him but to Leo it seemed anything but such.
“I take full responsibility for this boy. He can live in my house and just laze around,” said Hades with a false smile. Then whispering so no one could hear him, his warm breath would have spooked Leo had he been listening, “or just work day and night.” No one could’ve known what Hades had just whispered to Leo.
“The will that he wrote mentioned that about a third of his money to be given to you and all of the rest to be given to his son, right?” asked the Lawyer. The man affirmatively nodded.
“This boy is your cousin, George,” Hades said to Leo, pointing at the boy who resembled him. “You will live with him and his two siblings. Together we’ll have a lot of fun.”
“Yeah right,” muttered Leo, his voice lacing with sarcasm, “fun.”
“Come now boy,” said Hades, “No need to be so sarcastic and cynical. We’re a family now.”
“You think?” said Leo sardonically.
“C’mon, I know your father – my brother has just died, but being so angry and sarcastic won’t bring him back,” said Hades.
“Shut up Uncle,” shouted Leo, surprising everyone in the room. George gave Leo a pitying look which went unnoticed.
‘Leo will regret what he said,’ George thought, ‘Father will give him such a beating.’
“Boy we will sharpen up your manners later,” Hades said in a quiet tone. Never had he felt so disrespected. He would show that brat a thing or two once they went home.
After a while of confirming the timings of the funeral and such things, everyone apart from Hades and Leo and George were gone.
“George,” said Hades in a commanding and stern voice, “go home. I shall give this brat his beating once I reach home. Right now I have to talk to him about a very serious matter.” George gave an affirmative grunt and walked towards the door, giving a look of pity to Leo who didn’t notice it.
When they were alone, Hades let out a twisted and malevolent chuckle
“Shall I tell you something about your father, brat?” he said. Leo didn’t reply – he was still stunned on how his father died.
“That doctor is an amateur. He didn’t realize that the germ did not enter through natural means. Rather it was injected inside by a person who wanted your father out of the way so that he could take his son away; so that he could have the money from his will. Your father did not die from natural means; he was murdered by a ruthless and cunning person who did not hesitate to kill. That person, brat, was me,” revealed Hades.
Leo’s head perked up in anger and he glared at Hades with a burning fury that would make even the devil cower down with fear. Hades himself backed down with fear but he quickly regained his composure, trying not to show weakness to Leo although the fuming boy had noticed it and felt refreshed, knowing that some people still feared him even when he was in such a pathetic and pitiful state – it was true – Leo’s face was a mess as he had come directly from his archery practice without even bothering to comb his hair or clean his face of the dirt that had come whenever some idiot looking for fame tried to beat him up, although it was them who usually were beaten up.
“Now, now brat,” said Hades acting as if he were comforting the boy, “don’t go and do anything rash. A slave is worth nothing when he is dead.” He took out a concealed switchblade. Leo looked at the weapon with an expression that Hades mistook for fear. To his surprise, Leo calmly walked to a nearby sword stand and before Hades could say anything he took out a weapon.
It was a Saber – A deadly weapon that curved slightly at the end. It was meant to be used in executions as it could easily cut a person in half without any effort and just one swift strike. It was a Chinese sword that had been passed down his family for generations. In addition to that, the sword was said to have a mystical power that prevented its wielder from ever losing a battle.
“I shall live alone, Hades.” Leo did not bother to call Hades ‘uncle.’ “I’m sure that you know about these swords and their rumored power.”
“Whatever do you mean ‘swords?’ There is one sword only,” stated Hades his confident tone masking his true fear.
Leo smirked and showed the sword in such an angle that proved that there were two swords. The swords were very broad and sharp, and had many words written in a language which Leo didn’t understand – probably Chinese. The color, of course, was silver, and it shined so much that one could easily see their reflection if they gazed at it.
Leo split the two of them and got into a flawless stance, his facial expression practically daring Hades to come forth and attack him. Hades put his weapon down in defeat. He knew what a skilled swordsman the boy was and the sacred power the sword held.
“Go live on your own if you wish brat,” he spat.
“I don’t think so Hades,” said Leo, still wearing a mocking smile, “I will live alone, but you won’t. In fact, you won’t live in this world anymore.”
Hades’s eyes narrowed in fear and he jumped up in anger trying to reach his switchblade that was lying on the ground. Leo swiftly moved and made one quick blow with his twin swords in an amazing speed. A few seconds idly passed. Then suddenly, Hades’s head separated from his body and his blood gushed out from his neck. From the distance it would look like a pool of ketchup but upon closer look, anyone could tell that it was blood. A normal child of Leo’s age would have felt disgusted and frightened, but Leo did not in the least feel squeamish by it. Rather he was thrilled by it. He had avenged his father by killing his murderer. Leo’s could now rest easy, knowing that the person who had taken his father’s life away was right now burning in hell just like his name was.
That was one thing that Leo was surprised and confused by. What kind of parent would name their child Hades? It was possible that Hades changed his name later in his life but even though his name suited his sick and ruthless ways, not even he would want himself to be named after the infamous monster, Hades.
“Bye Uncle Hades,” said Leo, putting emphasis on the word Uncle as he walked away to find a place where he could actually stay. Besides he had no proof that Hades had murdered his father and thus he would be accused of murdering Hades and probably sent into a home or maybe even jail.
*End Flashback*
Sarmad continued to wave his arm in front of Leo’s face. Leo had phased out again a few minutes ago and Sarmad was annoyed at how deeply Leo seemed to be thinking.
Sarmad was about to poke Leo in his stomach when Leo suddenly appeared to come back to life he moved his head back and forth, frantically.
“What are you thinking about?” asked Sarmad, noticing Leo’s far-away look disappear.
“None of your business,” barked Leo. The memory of his father’s death had put Leo in a sour mood and he didn’t want to deal with Sarmad’s stupidity right about now. He raised his arms in an effort to show him that he would not hesitate to attack him right now.
Sarmad knew that any further attempts at questioning Leo would result in him getting beat up, so he wisely remained silent.
Leo recalled how the police had found him living in a cave in a place called Faultless Valley when he was about twenty years old. They had demanded that Leo return home but Leo had told them that he was in the legal age of living alone. The police accepted that fact but had then accused him of murder when they saw his swords.
Leo had lied that a common middle aged crook had killed Hades and that Leo had barely managed to survive. He said that he had then ran away because he had nothing to live for and that he had taken the swords as they were the one thing of his father’s that no one could ever keep other than his own kin.
Sadly one of the policemen had stripped Leo of his sabers and had taken them as he believed that Leo did not deserve them as he was suspected for murder. The keepers of peace had also forced Leo in court.
*Flashback*
“We shall bring the next case of a young man called Leonardo, who has been accused of committing the well known murder of Hades. Upon public demand, we have allowed the public and media to attend this trial. Also, because of public demand, we have allowed this case to be held earlier than usual because the mystery of Hades’s murder has been the most important story for a long time,” announced the clerk as Leo was brought in front of the judge safely handcuffed, although Leo showed no sign of struggling and his expression was blank.
“The name’s Leo, your honor. Leonardo was my father’s name.” Leo’s face was wearing a permanent scowl. The Judge and clerk both nodded but didn’t say anything
The public crowd immediately started to talk to each other excitedly and often gave a glare to Leo. While everyone thought that Leo could not hear their comments, he very well could, but he couldn’t care less.
“That’s the brat who murdered Hades and he was such a fine man too,” said a snobbish looking man.
“I pity the boy. How could a boy of his age have murdered a martial artist expert such as Hades? I think that he has been falsely accused,” commented a young and bright looking man, wearing a grey and warm looking mackintosh. Leo would have given anything to get that mackintosh. It was freezing cold where he was sitting. The man must have noticed Leo eying his mackintosh as he took it off and gave it to an officer who searched it and then gave it to Leo. Leo gazed at the coat in surprise. That man was one of the few people who had given him kindness in the past few years. For a split second Leo’s eyes turned innocent but as quickly and suddenly as it happened, they turned icy cold. Leo gave the man a grateful nod and he put the coat on.
“Hades was funding my company but when he died the company soon went bankrupt. May the Devil take the boy,” said a man to another one who agreed. Leo simply ignored the two men and glared at the pathetic people who called themselves civilized.
“Daddy why is that man giving angry looks at everyone?” asked an innocent and care-free looking boy of nine years old. Leo’s face slightly softened at the sight of the boy’s confused expression. Leo wished that his childhood was as simple as the child’s. Leo promised himself that he would never try to take the child’s innocence from him.
“Because, he killed a man who had done nothing to him,” answered the boy’s father. Leo frowned – Hades had done nothing to him? Hades had taken the remaining innocence that the boy had by killing his father. Leo had made up his mind that he would say the whole truth in court and not lie at all. He would tell everyone the truth about Hades’s death.
“We will have order,” said Judge Stamp slamming his gavel on his table. The crowd quieted down almost instantly. Judge Stamp was a middle aged man wearing a wig over his bald head. His face demanded order and justice which suited his occupation. He muttered under his breath, “This is so pressurizing. The last time a case was given this much attention was when that guy Ron and some friend of his came. What was his name? Boral, no wait, it was Boarin, or was it Boarash. Oh well, who cares.” Then in a loud voice he said “Is it true that you murdered Hades?”
“Yes,” said Leo simply. The crowd and jury were momentarily stunned by the confession made by the man but after a few seconds they began to chatter with each other and gave Leo fierce looks.
“Order!” commanded Judge Stamp. “Earlier reports suggest that you said something else when being questioned by the policemen. Which of your reports are true?”
“The one I just said,” answered Leo, his face betraying no expression.
“You mean you lied to the officers?” said the Judge.
“Yes,” said Leo.
“You may now explain why you murdered him,” said the Judge.
“Thank you, your honor,” said Leo, as he stood up and took a deep breath, “I indeed murdered Hades, but I had a valid reason to do so.”
“When I first entered my house and saw my father in the bed, I noticed a number of people. One of them included Hades, who for some reason frightened me and emitted an eerie aura. When my father died, I felt a sudden urge to attack Hades but I didn’t feel this for any of the other people who were there. Thankfully I managed to curb that wish. When no one was looking he whispered to me something about me becoming his slave but I didn’t pay much attention to him as I was still stunned as my father had died.” The crowd began to chatter, excitedly and they sent looks that accused him of lying to Leo who ignored him. They also shouted curses and oaths at him yet again Leo ignored them.
“Liar!” shouted one.
“Curse you, brat,” cursed a middle-aged man.
“Stop lying,” said another.
“Do you think that we’re idiots?’ a man demanded.
“I’ll show him,” said one of them whose company was previously funded by Hades. He was a distinguished middle-aged man with black hair that looked like coal but it had many streaks of white in it as well. The man got up from his chair and pulled his sleeves up, showing a tattoo of a grey dragon and six sky blue stars. He walked up to strike Leo but before he could a few policemen grabbed and restrained him.
“You do anything of that sort and we’ll fine you for assault,” said a policeman, sternly. The man ignored him and continued to struggle.
“Take that man out of the court and give him a hefty fine,” ordered Judge Stamp.
The policemen attempted to force the thrashing man out of the court but the man continued to shout oaths and he still struggled.
“Long live Hades!” he shouted, before he was led outside and the door was shut. The court was silent until all of the people in it apart from the jury, the Judge, Leo and other officers began to chant.
“Long live Hades!” they all said, in a singing sort of voice.
“Execute the murderer!” some of them yelled.
“Roast him over a slow fire!” another person said, while many cheered.
“Torture him!” a few of them suggested.
“Sentence him to life long prison with torture!” the majority insisted.
“We will have order!” said Judge Stamp in a commanding voice as the crowd silenced themselves, hushing each other.
“Wait,” said a member of the accusing party. “You have just said that you weren’t listening – then how could you have heard something like this. I think you’re lying. Hades had a good reputation and he had children who were well kept.
“I wasn’t listening very intently but obviously I could hear him somewhat. And how do you know that they were well kept? For all you know, they may have been threatened to stay quiet otherwise they would get a beating,” defended Leo. The man who had questioned Leo nodded and muttered something inaudible.
“If Hades’s children are here, I summon them to court,” added Leo. The crowd went silent and not a word was uttered, as they all waited in suspense, whether they were there or not. Finally three children of sixteen got up and they all walked up to court. Leo recognized one of them as the one who was with him when his father had died.
“My name is Anne and I’m the daughter of Hades,” said a girl.
“My name Jack and I’m his first born son,” said a boy. He pointed to the other boy, “and this is my twin brother, George. He doesn’t talk much, mind you.” George simply grunted.
“Anne may talk,” said the Judge.
“Thank you mister,” said Anne, “I’m the first child of my father. To be blunt, my father treated me like trash.” The crowd was stunned by this declaration.
“He constantly mocked me for having traits from my late mother and not from himself and often gave me threats of beatings, although he never carried them out. But I was a naïve little girl and thought that he might do it if I tell anyone about my predicament. However I do think that he had a bit of a soft spot for me as he treated my unfortunate brothers even worst. Thank you.” With a bow the teenager went back, as the Judge’s and everyone else’s mind began processing everything that had been told to them. Leo simply gave a smirk.
“Jack may talk, now,” said the Judge, regaining his composure.
“Just like my sister said, my father treated me as trash as well,” said Jack. “I speak on behalf of George as well, because he doesn’t like to talk at all and he and I have had the same punishments.”
“Unlike Anne,” continued Jack, “my father actually carried out his threats as he frequently beat me up. Every morning I was supposed to be up by six AM and if not, then I would be whipped until I got out of bed. I have had several scars because of his constant whipping and beatings.”
“I don’t see any scars!” shouted someone from the crowd. Jack didn’t say anything, instead he took off his shirt. The crowd was silenced in horror.
There was not an inch of Jack’s body that wasn’t covered in scars. There were dozens and dozens of them. Each of them was more visible and prominent than the last. One of the women in court covered the eyes of her son. The most prominent one was one that stretched across his stomach. However there were many that looked almost as painful, such as one that stretched across his shoulder and down his arm, where it split into many small scars. Another one covered his higher back and it too branched off to many small ones.
The crowd, jury and judge winced as they continued to scan him. Even Leo felt something not unlike pity stir inside his heart. This boy had had it just as worse as Leo himself had, if not worst. While Leo had felt emotional pain, these two have felt physical. Leo wasn’t sure which was worst but he knew that both were very painful. This was the first time Leo felt a human emotion such as pity since a long time.
“George has similar scars,” said Jack, trying to relieve the tension, but failing terribly. He looked at the glances that showed pity sent by the people present. “Don’t worry you guys, they don’t hurt anymore.”
“You mean that you have gotten used to the pain.”
Everyone turned to see a certain blue eyed character who had said this – Leo.
“You’ve had it just as bad as I have,” continued Leo, “but instead of trying to fight the pain that has constantly haunted you; you have accepted it and lived with it. I know because I’ve had it just like you. Instead of believing that it will go away with time, you’ve learnt to live with it and accepted the fact that it is a permanent mark that will haunt you till the end of time.”
“You’re right,” admitted Jack after staying quiet for a few moments. The crowd began to compose themselves and chattered amongst themselves excitedly, occasionally sending pitying looks at Hades’s children.
“Order!” shouted Judge Stamp, regaining his composure, slamming his gavel on his table loudly and the crowd gradually became silent. “We have evidence that Hades had partaken in child abuse before his death. Thus it is possible that Hades had said something like what you have described.
“He’s lying,” shouted one man of the crowd who still heavily supported Hades. The man got up and just like a certain, distinguished man who was paying a hefty fine right now, reached out to attack Leo who couldn’t do anything as he was handcuffed. The Judge didn’t need to say anything as the policemen instantly got up and grabbed the man and restrained him all the while saying many threats. The man did not listen and continued to struggle.
“Take him away,” Judge Stamp sighed as the policemen forced the man outside of the court. But like the man who had earlier tried to attack Leo, he shouted,
“Long live Hades.” He expected everyone to follow his lead and start chanting, but, to his astonishment, no one did so, as he was forced outside. Everyone had privately begun to question Hades and no one was eager to continue to support him.
“Move on, Leo,” said the Judge, with another sigh.
“Thank you, your honor,” said Leo, although his voice held no sense of gratitude. “To further confirm what I said, I summon Joe who was present back then.” The crowd split as the lawyer who had been there when Leo’s Father had died, bravely walked up.
“Thank you, Leo,” said Joe. “Your honor, it is true that I was there when Leo’s father died. When I asked Hades if he were to adopt Leo, he had given me an affirmative answer. However just before I could say anything else, he whispered something to Leo, but I hadn’t thought much of it. I had thought that I must have imagined it or I was hallucinating so we went forward with our conversation and I soon left after we had discussed things such as the funeral of Leo’s father.”
“How do we know that you aren’t lying and Leo bribed you for saying all these lies?” shouted someone from the accusing party.
“Because I don’t have the money to bribe Joe,” answered Leo, calmly, silencing the person who said this. “May I continue your honor?”
“You may,” answered Judge Stamp.
“Once everyone had left, Hades said something that angered me – he said that the germ that caused my father to die had not wound up in his body naturally,” explained Leo, “He told me that the germ had been injected by someone who wanted the money from my father’s will and that the man who had done this wanted me as a slave and that the doctor did not know this as he was an amateur. Then he confessed that he was the man who had done that.”
The crowd was left speechless, and all they did was gape at the man and secretly began to question their beliefs of Hades.
“Continue,” said Judge Stamp, as he recovered from the shock.
“Thank you, your honor,” said Leo, “Naturally, I was angered at him for that and gave him the angriest glare I could muster. When I did that, Hades took out a switchblade and threatened me with it, but instead of being frightened, I ran to a nearby sword stand and took out the two sabers that have been passed down my family for generations. Those swords were rumored to have a sacred power that prevented their wielder from ever losing a fight.”
“Hades was very superstitious,” continued Leo, inwardly smiling as he remembered the memory, “he believed in the power of the swords and dropped his weapon. But I was so angry at the fact that he murdered the one person who actually cared for me that I did not allow him to live and took his life from him without a second thought and to this day, I don’t regret my actions.”
The crowd was yet again rendered astounded and wordless by Leo’s speech. The Judge recovered quickly as he had experience with such things.
“Are you done with your speech?” he inquired. Upon receiving a nod, he continued, “does the opposing party have anything to say?”
The leader of the opposing party nodded and rose.
“Thank you, your honor,” he said, “First of all we have no proof that anything Leo says is true. And I know someone who has researched on the disease that killed your father and he said that the germ was very rare. Please explain how Hades must have got that germ.”
“No idea,” answered Leo, with a little smile, “That’s a question for a doctor, not for me. Hades just told me what happened and I believed him.”
“That’s an answer that will not do, Leo,” said the Judge, “Continue.”
“Wait!” shouted someone from the crowd. The Judge sighed once again. He was getting too old for this, “What is your name and what is it that you want?”
“My name won’t mean a thing to you, but usually I’m called Terror and I’m a doctor. I beg to differ with this man.”
“Figures,” Judge Stamp mumbled under his breath, “nice name.” Terror heard what he said but ignored him – he had heard that joke many times.
“I worked at the clinic where Hades usually came,” he said. “I was also the preferred doctor of Hades and he often came to me with unusual requests and all of them were request to obtain dangerous microbes such as C2, which is the germ that Leo’s father got. He took it about a month before he died.”
The crowd was once again shocked and their mouths opened and closed like hungry goldfish. More evidence to Leo’s accusation was being provided.
“I have a question for Inspector Bravar,” said Terror. A few minutes passed and the requested man soon walked up hurriedly.
“What is it, Mr. Terror?” he asked, trying to get it over and done with. He had to save somebody’s kidnapped dog, investigate a robbed bank, search for the Queen’s lost jewels, save a cat from a tree, buy groceries for his house, visit a few friends of his, and have a meeting with the Superintendent of the Police. Thus he had very little time for additional things such as this court matter.
“I know that this isn’t my place to say, but I have just thought of another piece of evidence, which supports Leo,” Terror smiled at the Judge.
“It should be Leo who should be defending himself, but as he had no money for lawyers and has to defend himself by himself, I suppose I can make an exception.” The Judge returned the smile that Terror had sent him. ‘Weird name for such an amiable person,’ he secretly thought.
“Tell me Inspector, do you have any knowledge of the infamous death of ‘Hale, the Future?’” Terror’s expression turned as grim as the sky on a cloudy night.
“Yes, of course,” answered the Inspector, “he was on the brink of becoming the owner of Hades’s company when he died of a virus known as Hypotenthery. Wait surely you aren’t…” He trailed off as the answer became obvious to every person who was in the room.
They all put their head down in sorrow as Terror confirmed what they all were assuming, “Hades had asked me for that germ before Hale died as well.”
“There were many such people who I think must have died like this,” Terror said, somberly, as he thought of all the lives that had been lost. “The famous Babur, who was suing him for assault, died in a similar way. The well known Ishaque also died the same way. Norton, Maize, Lenny, Jackie, Jake, Marsh, Jamshed, Edward, James, Chuck, Brawly, Jason, Lamber, Jamal all of whom were famous people also died in identical fashion. I am finished, your honor.” He held up his hands for emphasis, as he said the names.
“Thank you, Terror,” said Judge Stamp, truly gratefully. “You may have given us the final clue we need.” He lowered his tone to a whisper and said, “By the way you might get laughed at very often if you keep that idiotic name. Give yourself a graceful name such as George or Noah.” He gave a muffled snicker.
Terror twitched – many people had made fun of his name but nobody had the nerve to tell him to change it. “At least it’s better than to be named after stamps. You want me to stamp your stamp onto an envelope, huh Stamp? I’ll send you to Stamp Land,” he shouted.
The jury and Judge were shocked beyond belief and just gazed at the man, who was leaving the court and murmuring inaudible things.
“Little whippersnapper,” Judge Stamp commented, “Thinks he knows everything. How I’d like to box his ears, and show him what a talented brawler, I used to be in my youth.”
“Just admit that you got embarrassed in front of a live crowd,” an anonymous person from the crowd said, as the others roared with laughter, although the joke that Terror made wasn’t very funny – in fact it was a rather lame one in their opinion. The judge slowly turned red – not with embarrassment, but with fury.
“Don’t explode like you did last time, Judge,” the clerk whispered into his ear, “this is a courtroom, not a fighting zone. Besides that disrespectful punk is long gone. He’s so pathetic; he’s not even worth your time.”
The clerk was cunningly manipulating Judge Stamp to avoid a show. He shivered as he remembered the last time, the short tempered Judge had exploded. The ambulances had to be called and the Judge himself was successfully sued by a victim of his rampage. Judge Stamp was almost stripped of his position as a Judge, but he managed to wriggle out of that fate.
“Continue with what you were saying before you were rudely interrupted,” the Judge said to the leader of the opposing party who had not laughed at all.
“Very well, your honor,” said the man. “Even if Hades was responsible for your father’s death, you had no right to kill him. Rather, you should’ve informed the police of this. Why didn’t you?”
“Do you think that the police would have believed me?” inquired Leo, with a hint of sarcasm. “They’d probably have brushed it off as me being upset at my father’s death and hence wouldn’t have believed me and would have insisted that I go visit a physician or get mental help. And if Hades would have found out, he would have beaten me, harshly.” Leo was talking, yet he seemed quiet, as if he weren’t even there. Perhaps it was because he looked so bored and annoyed by the whole thing. Whatever it was, it was of unimportance anyway.
“Duly noted,” said the man. “That is all, your honor.” The judge nodded.
“I grant anyone from the jury or the parties ten seconds to say anything more to oppose or help this case,” he said. No hands went up. “In that case, I shall ask the jury what they think. Who says that Leo should be punished for murdering Hades even if he had killed his father?” A number of affirmative answers could be heard and many hands went up. “Who says that Leo should be let off, as he was merely taking revenge for his father, and because he was ridding the world of a criminal?” A small number of hands went up.
“I believe the boy’s story,” a man of about fifty said, who was voting against Leo, “but that was no reason to kill a man. Despite of whatever you think of the police, they should’ve been informed.”
Most of the people who were voting against Leo were using the same logic and reasoning for their actions. Leo looked on in dismay as he realized that he was to be punished. The man who had given Leo his mackintosh had voted that Leo should be punished. Leo was once again shocked – another person who he had a soft spot for had betrayed him by voting against him. Leo did not feel anything but utter disdain at the man. His anger had gone to immeasurable heights and he jumped off the chair, suddenly, even though he was still handcuffed and made his way to the man. He pushed his way through the crowed, practically begging to be set loose. The police followed him and restrained him, with a lot of threats, but to their dismay, Leo didn’t care – he had been betrayed too many times for him to simply be angry and not take action.
He struggled and kicked, while the judge constantly slammed his gavel down. The people were shouting for the police, who were trying their best, but never had they seen a person with such brute strength.
Leo was pushing his way through the crowd when a frightened and worried child appeared in his way. Leo stopped and thought it through. He could just go through the boy, but that would make him no different than Hades. On the other hand, he could stop but lose his chance to give that man the beating he deserved.
Leo chose to stop.
“I refuse to hit a child,” he said to himself and gently touched the boys shoulder. “Where’s your mommy?”
“She-she ran away the moment you became free mister,” the boy stammered, shocked at how gentle and soft a hardened and tough looking man’s touch could be.
“So she left you like a typical and selfish parent who doesn’t care about her son,” shouted Leo, angrily. The boy covered his face with his hands, in fear. Leo’s face softened and he said in a gentler tone, “Go to the nice Judge over there and he’ll take you there.” He was being held and taken away by the policemen. “Hurry up!”
“Your compassion for children is your weakness,” said a stern looking policeman.
“I should have known that the keeper’s of justice don’t like people who try to help children,” Leo gave a smart and mocking reply.
“Children are nothing but whining brats,” the policeman said as he dragged Leo away.
“You pathetic weakling,” Leo insulted. “Were you never a child?”
“No I never was,” the policeman replied, without sarcasm.
“Weak-minded fool,” Leo murmured as he punched the policeman in the stomach and reached out and searched for the traitor – the man who had voted for him to be cast in prison after making Leo feel that he was a person who could be trusted.
After scores and scores of punches and kicks and jabs and blows, Leo finally reached his prey and he jumped on him and slammed his handcuffs down on his face and kicked him with all his might, all the while shouting curses. After a few minutes, he was finally restrained by the policemen and knocked out, with a blow to his neck. However his actions had very grave consequences.
The victim of Leo’s ferocious assault had a bloodied nose and his face was bleeding all over. Fortunately, none of his bones were broken although his arm was fractured. The man’s mackintosh that Leo had thrown off the moment he reached him was also covered in blood and his clothes were in tatters.
“Barbarian!” he shouted at the unconscious man. “I should give you the beating you deserve, but I won’t.” His face softened. “I’m not like you. I understand your reasoning and I pity you, but that is no reason to kill someone. I’m sorry, Leo, if you feel that I’ve betrayed you.”
The Judge straightened out his tie and wig that had become messed up during the hullaballoo. He slammed his gavel down and everyone calmed down somewhat.
“I charge Leo with murder, assault, and dishonesty to licensed policemen. Hence, I sentence him to jail for five years, and once those have been finished, you will have to pay a fine of eighty dollars. The fine is low as the man has provided proper reasoning for his actions and because the victim was an unidentified criminal who has murdered more people than most. Case closed,” he said, in a very straightforward tone.
*End Flashback*
Leo clenched his fists so hard that a small amount of blood trickled out of it. He was now reminded of what all had happened when he made friends. He didn’t need friends at all. They had tried to use him again. He learnt one more important thing.
The human race was not to be trusted.
Leo had gone through such a childhood that the prison walls had to be repaired several times due to his constant punching of it. He remembered how his fellow prisoners had tried to mess with him during his first day.
*Flashback*
“Get in,” said one of the police officers, as they pushed Leo inside the prison cell, roughly. Leo calmly walked inside and sat down on a wooden bench and put his head down. While his face was without an emotion and was blank, he was burning with anger and brimming with rage at his misfortune. His life was completely and utterly terrible. The human race had stripped him off his childhood and tore it to shreds. Leo did not want anything to do with these – these savage brutes, who called themselves generous and civilized.
He was the only real human alive. The others had strayed from the path and had become self-centered, selfish, utterly useless and lazy, uncultured and barbaric creatures. Leo had made up his mind that he would destroy and make the world rid of these ungrateful beasts once he was free. A few muscular prisoners who were leaning against the wall decided to go and pick a fight with the new guy. They all looked intimidating and frightening, but to Leo, they were mere bugs, needed to be squashed.
“What’s your name,” asked one of them, clearly looking for a fight. He was a fat, meaty and powerful looking person.
Leo didn’t reply and just stayed still. The man impatiently awaited an answer for ten seconds but then he grabbed Leo by the collar and lifted him up.
“Let go of me you filthy, prison freak,” said Leo, in a low, threatening and dangerous voice. The prisoner was taken-aback for a few seconds but then he quickly regained his composure.
“The silent type, it seems,” he said, with an unfriendly chuckle, “I don’t like people who ignore me.”
He tightened his grip on Leo’s collar and slammed him against the wall, expecting for him to cry out in pain. But to his astonishment, the man didn’t seem at all fazed by it. Instead Leo gave a little smirk and gave a wild jab to his attacker’s stomach; the man doubled over in pain. Then Leo gave a kick to the exact same place causing the prisoner to cough up blood and saliva. Leo gave a sadistic grin.
“Don’t mess with me.” With that and another amazingly powerful blow, his enemy was on the ground while Leo stood up high as he looked down at the man with disgust. “You’re pathetic garbage and don’t even deserve to live. Be happy that you’re still breathing, you barbarian.”
“Hey, what’s going on in there?” shouted a prison warden, outside the cell. A few policemen were with him, each holding a truncheon and armed with a Pistol. They all entered the prison cell.
“Alright break it up,” shouted one of them, using his truncheon to strike Leo.
One word went through Leo’s mind, ‘Savages.’
Instead of Leo being in pain the truncheon itself broke in half. The policeman’s eyes widened at the sight. Instead of using it to his advantage, Leo put his arms in the air peacefully. Once everything was over and the prisoners were on the floor, with their hands behind their backs, the warden folded his arms with a sigh.
“Alright what happened?” he questioned.
“These people are savages,” snarled Leo, “they thought it would be fun to mess with the new guy and so I showed them not to pick on a guy like me.”
“Why does Mort have to pick a fight with everyone who is new to the cell? I shall have to give him solitary treatment again,” sighed the Warden. He beckoned at a few of the policemen who grabbed him and dragged him out of the cell. He pointed to Leo and addressed him, “what’s your name?”
“Leo,” was the short answer.
“Don’t try to give the other prisoners more broken bones,” said the Warden, as he went out of the cell, with a sigh, and locked it, securely. Many of the prisoners got up and stared at Leo as if they were about to attack him. However instead of doing so they got up and started to clap. One of them came near Leo and thumped him on the back.
“Man anyone who can do that to Mort is a good friend of mine. Mort was a terrible guy who always attacked us and forced to do things like be his personal punching bag,” he said, grinning. “We’ll be allies or if possible friends. The name’s Jackson.”
“Hey don’t mind Jackson, there, he’s a real softie underneath his tough persona,” shouted one of the prisoners causing everyone but Leo to laugh.
“Hey!” Jackson said, rather playfully for someone of his age.
“Why did you come to jail again?” one of them asked.
“I was falsely accused of assault!” answered Jackson.
“I believe you. You don’t have the nerve or guts to hurt a fly,” said a prisoner, laughing loudly.
“You want to bet on that?” Jackson said, in a serious tone, looking intimidating because of his large figure. The prisoner who had commented just stared at Jackson before they both broke into hearty laughter.
“Shut up, you tough guy wannabes!” a voice sounded. Everybody turned to see a very dark and angry looking Leo.
“I don’t need friends or allies,” the man said in a low tone. Everyone was stunned and all became silent. “Now leave me alone, you Halloween rejects.” Everyone obliged with his command, not wanting to mess with the person who had beaten Mort without even trying. Leo smirked and went back to the bench.
*End Flashback*
“Leo, Leo, Leo,” said Sarmad, irritatingly in a singsong voice.
“What is it!?” shouted Leo.
“What are you thinking about?” asked Sarmad.
“Keep your questions to yourself,” snapped Leo.
“I won’t keep quiet until you tell me what is bothering you. That’s what friends do,” said Sarmad.
“First of all, we aren’t friends. I’ll get you a free chocolate bar, when we get back, if you stop pestering me,” Leo smirked. He didn’t want to bribe Sarmad, but it was just so easy. Leo was right and Sarmad stopped bothering him.
*Flashback*
“I’ve forgotten what the outside world was like,” muttered Leo, to himself.
He had finally gotten out of his prison and paid his small fine. Ever since he had beaten up the savage who called himself Mort, not many people who tried to come close to him had stayed conscious very long. He had quickly dispatched of them and went back to sitting on his bench from where he rarely moved. Eventually Leo had to be given a single person cell, because the medical people could not afford so many broken bones. He smirked at the memory.
“Well I guess it’s time I pay a visit to the person who has taken my father’s Sabers. I refuse to leave them with a savage,” Leo said, to himself. Leo spent a few hours searching for the officer who had taken his prized weapons. Eventually he found what he wanted – Joseph Lent, House 431. Location is Argon. A few days had passed until Leo had earned the money to afford a taxi ride to Argon as it was quite far away.
He pressed the bell and waited patiently. He waited for a few minutes but no one answered. He pressed the bell again and very soon a shouting was heard.
“We don’t want any!” a woman’s voice rang.
“I’m here to see Joseph,” said Leo, trying to be polite and to suppress his urge to break this woman in half. Apparently this woman was hanging the laundry on the roof and she glared down at Leo.
“What do you want him for?” said the Woman. “I don’t allow my husband to meet such brainless brutes as you.”
“You might want to know that it is taking all my power not to break you in half,” said Leo, sick of being polite and now he was merely feigning it.
“As if you could,” said the Woman, scornfully, “my husband would be here immediately.”
“Would you rather call him or should I come up for you and beat you so you can yell for him,” inquired Leo, in a deathly calm voice.
“Fine, fine, keep your shirt on,” said the woman, hastily.
“Stupid woman,” murmured Leo.
“What was that?!” shouted the woman. Leo winced and covered his ears in pain.
“I said that you’re a terrible person and that I might as well come up to break you if I don’t see your husband in ten seconds!” Leo shouted back, glaring at the annoying woman.
“Fine,” said the woman, with a huff, trying not to attack Leo as she knew that she would probably not stand a chance. “Joseph dear, there’s a man who wants to see you.”
“Coming,” came a man’s deep voice from inside the house. In a few minutes a man was standing on the doorway looking at his guest. “Do I know you?”
“I’m a former prisoner, just got out of jail,” said Leo, bluntly. The woman screamed and cowered behind her husband who tensed. “Relax; I’m not here to hurt you.”
“What king of brainless brute doesn’t want to hurt?” said the woman, who Leo figured was Mrs. Joseph.
“Excuse us,” said Joseph, “I’ll talk to our visitor.” Mrs. Joseph went inside without a word. “What do you want?”
“My name is Leo,” introduced Leo, “I was arrested by you for murdering Hades and was sentenced to jail. I hope you remember me.”
“Vividly.”
“In that case, you should remember the two Sabers you took from me. I demand them back! They’re the only possessions I have of my late father. Please I beg you.” Leo swallowed his pride.
“Everyone deserves a second chance,” shrugged Joseph, without a second thought. “I’ll go get them.” He went back into the house, leaving a dumbfounded Leo outside.
Why would he give it to him even though he knew all about his shady past? It didn’t make sense. Most police officers would have mocked him and not given his beloved swords to him as they did not have to. The shocked man heard shouts from the wife and her husband.
“No, no, he is here in peace. Don’t worry, he won’t harm us, if he even thinks of harming you or myself, I’ll give him my fabled Joseph Lock. You know how deadly that move is, and how nobody has ever escaped from it when I’ve had it locked in. Now, now you know that the frying pan is a cooking utensil, not a weapon to hit your husband with,” was what Leo could make out Joseph was saying.
“Here,” said Joseph, finally coming downstairs, holding a couple of Sabers in his hands. Once could make out something that looked suspiciously a lot like a lump on his head, no doubt caused by a frying pan wielded by an enraged woman.
“You’re just giving it to me,” said Leo, finally coming to terms with what was going on. “Without stopping me or trying to avoid giving it to a crook like me?”
“Yeah, sure, why not?” asked Joseph, “Everyone deserves a second chance.”
“Thanks Joseph, I won’t misuse your trust,” Leo acknowledged him before he left.
“I pity that young man,” said Joseph to his wife once Leo had left.
“Pity?” said Mrs. Joseph, dramatically, “that man should be given another year in jail just for showing his pathetic face in public. You know, I resent the fact that you gave him those Sabers. He’ll go killing innocent people who did nothing to him, I’ll warrant.”
“Everyone deserves another chance,” reasoned Joseph, although he knew that reasoning with his wife was futile. “I think that he’ll simply go into self exile.”
“Well that’ll make me happy. One less brute to worry about,” muttered Mrs. Joseph.
“You do know that I was a crook as well back in my old days?” said Joseph. “I was stealing for survival. I was a child back then; my life is similar to this man’s. Don’t you remember how he reasoned his actions back at court? If what he said was true, then I don’t blame him. He was a sixteen year old confused child and his father died before his very eyes and then some person, who doesn’t seem to be the best of people says, claims to have murdered him. Wouldn’t you want to kill the man who supposedly did the same to one of the few people who was your last hope for a good life?”
Mrs. Joseph just stared at the spot Leo had been standing on a few minutes ago and said nothing. Her mind was racing, but not in consideration of what her husband had just said, but of utter rage. How dare her husband believe such an unbelievable story that Leo had hatched in court?! She’d rather believe in aliens than in that nonsense. Her husband really needed to wake up from his small little bubble.
True to Joseph’s prediction, Leo went into self exile into a valley, instead of going on a killing spree to wipe out the filth of the world. He had decided that that was a job for the police and hopefully no outlaw will ever kill a person’s childhood ever again. Instead of having a savage human for a neighbor, Leo had animals such as deer. Leo befriended him and didn’t eat them or any nearby animals. Instead the nearby animals brought Leo some meat of an animal from somewhere. When Leo didn’t want to have meat, he took a few eggs from some stray chicken nearby and, surprisingly, they didn’t mind. There was also a clean river that prevented any shortage of water and also provided fish to eat for him.
There Leo lived a pleasant and peaceful life until one day, a young man named Sarmad who was travelling around the world, arrived there and with him he brought a light that gave Leo a purpose in life again.
From then on, Leo was determined never to lose sight of that small spark of light in the darkness.
*End Flashback*

Chapter 5

Spoiler (Click to View)

“You want to dump a bottle of water on him, so that he wakes up from his day-dream?” asked Zack, silently.
“Nah,” said Sarmad, “he must have a reason. For once, I think we should let him be.”
To say that Zack was shocked would be an understatement. Why would Sarmad, of all people, not want to prank somebody? He was the master of pranks. Zack was wondering if the apocalypse was near or if Sarmad wasn’t feeling well. He worriedly put a hand on Sarmad’s forehead and checked the temperature.
“It feels fine,” he muttered, to himself. Sarmad looked on at Zack’s antics with some amusement and some confusion.
“No, I’m not sick, just feeling noble, I guess,” said Sarmad. Zack looked even more shocked.
“Boy you must really be sick,” he mumbled.
“You know, I never thought that Sarmad would turn down a prank,” said Leo, shocking the two pranksters.
“For how long have you been listening to us?” asked Zack.
“Long enough to know that Sarmad is growing a brain and is slowly but surely maturing,” answered Leo, before relapsing to meditation.
“Hey!” said Sarmad, acting as if he were hurt by Leo’s comment. Leo didn’t reply and Sarmad chose to let him be. He murmured something to Zack who said something back. What was a normal friend to friend talk had soon turned into a war.
“I’m pretty sure that I can make Leo beg for mercy after a prank, I have in mind,” said Zack, in a loud tone.
“Well I know that I can make him rage around the house with his hands tied behind his head and his skin painted green,” countered Sarmad, in an equally loud voice. Leo twitched at hearing all these challenges the two were making about him. He made a mental note to lock his door whenever he went to sleep and to hire a guard who was actually capable and strong.
Leo almost shuddered as he remembered what the two had done to the previous guard. That man was probably permanently traumatized by their experiment that they did – whether a human can survive two consecutive and strong punches to the stomach or not. Their answer was that a human can, but not without severe trauma and psychological pain and throwing up a little. Fortunately after pestering Boris for a while, the two troublemakers had gotten enough money to make it up to the poor man.
Leo wasn’t sure if their experiment was based on curiosity, or just to make sure that Leo knew that a security guard would not be able to help him. Leo was interrupted at his pondering at the sound of Boris screaming at them.
“Enough!” he roared. He began to murmur with himself, “Oh God save the Queen! My lungs are paining me at the shouting I do. I wish they were more like Leo. Sure he’s antisocial, but at least he doesn’t make me shout or yell. But these two are like children – always quibbling over the smallest of things. Oh God save the Queen! Why do I put up with them? They’re devils in disguises, I tell you. I’m about to request that they leave the house and get one of their own but they give me that innocent look that not even a puppy can make. How can I possible say no to that? Oh God Save the Queen!” Boris continued to ramble on and on until the men thought that Boris was a retired actor as he was being so overdramatic.
“You said the Queen part three times,” commented Sarmad.
“Did I?” Boris forgot all about his anger momentarily and thought back to his words. “I don’t think I did.”
“No you said it, all right,” said Sarmad.
“Are you saying I have short term memory!?” Boris’s temper flared and he glared at Sarmad.
“Uh, no, of course not,” Sarmad had never felt so small in his life and he didn’t want to become a victim to Boris’s onslaught. The professor’s mood changed instantly.
“Why thank you,” he said, happy-go-luckily.
“Guys, is it just me, or is Boris more moody than usual?” said Zack.
“Mood swings, no doubt. But why?” answered Sarmad, with a question of his own.
“He must be crumbling under the pressure that he’s keeping bottled up,” theorized Zack.
“Agreed,” said Leo, shortly.
“What should we do about it?” said Sarmad.
“Let him vent it out and just listen but don’t say anything back to him,” said Leo. “Hopefully, by the time we reach the site Boris will have vented out all of his complaints.”
“Let’s take turns,” suggested Sarmad.
“Well I’m going last,” said Zack, with a shudder.
“I’ll go second,” said Leo.
“I’ll go last,” said Sarmad, unaware that Zack had already taken that spot.
“Too late,” grinned Zack. Then in a low voice he said to himself, “let the Sarmad torture begin.”
“We switch timings and I owe you a donut,” whispered Sarmad.
“On second thought, I’ll go first,” said Zack. In a whisper meant for Sarmad, he added, “That’s ten donuts you owe me. Remember, the deadline is next Friday.” Sarmad pretended not to hear Zack although he did. He was far too intelligent in these kinds of things and knew that with good luck, they would land before his turn comes. That’ll take Zack down a notch or two.
The rest of the trip was uneventful and boring without any arguments. Leo was thinking of his earlier conversations with Sarmad. Zack and said person were engaged in a silent debate, careful not to disturb Boris who was piloting the helicopter while whistling peacefully, with his long, white hair blowing to the sides every now and then. Both Leo and Zack had to listen to the latter constantly relieve himself off all of his frustrations and problems, many of them having to do with two particular troublemakers. Fortunately for Sarmad, he had avoided his turn because Boris didn’t talk at all during his turn. Sarmad concluded that Boris had let out all of his worries and thus the mood swings would probably not be happening for a long time.
After a while the men landed in an isolated island down South, filled with nothing but grass and greenery at all. The place was heavily uninhabited and not much could be heard. A lot of moss was growing on many of the rocks which were abundant. They were in all kinds of colors – ruby red, grassy green, pitch black, and even snow white, among others. Many of them had been delivered by the generous sea that seemed to never end.
The sea was glowing as it reflected the blistering and fiery Sun’s image. The wind was ragingly loud and rapid as it sent the sand swirling through the wind. The land met the sea a bit farther up the shore although the latter often sneaked forward, threatening to pull the men inside, before it, itself was pulled back by the land that demanded its territory back. Nothing could be heard except for the monotonous sound of the waves coming forwards and backwards, and forwards, and backwards…
Not a bird was in the sky. The sky was sunny as the clouds proudly gleamed with their pure white fluff but they were being pushed away by the wind and after a while they were but a memory to the island.
After what seemed to be an eternity of gazing at the sheer beauty of the island and its seashore, the men were finally alerted to what was happening when Sarmad who was slowly walking forward to embrace the water, slipped and clumsily fell flat on his face. Everyone jumped frantically but once they noticed Sarmad standing up and rubbing his nose, they got the picture.
“Figures,” murmured Leo. Sarmad nervously laughed and tried to prevent the blood rushing to his cheeks
Zack looked around in surprise. He had always been a city person and rarely, if ever came into the country. He was rather captivated by the beauty and envied anyone who lived in such a place. Now he understood why country folk were rarely discontented by their lack of money – they had such a beautiful home. What more could a man want? Leo shared Zack’s envy, although he also felt proud that even if most of the people were savages, at least the world was still so very beautiful.
“This is very beautiful,” he said, “Zack, have you ever heard of the Faultless Valley? True to its name, it is without a fault and is the most beautiful place in the world in my opinion. I used to live there. It’s an amazing place indeed yet with a hint of mystery to it. A river flows right through its middle, going down from one mountain and then climbing the other where it soon leaves to join its companions at sea. There are plenty of animals there as well and I like them. They often bring food to whomever they trust and if anyone wants something else, than you can take some eggs from the chickens that live nearby; they don’t really mind at all. Or you can have fish from the river as well. I used to live there before I met Sarmad who for some reason was traveling around the world.”
“I was challenged by a friend of mine to see if I would visit the most beautiful places of the world and complete the challenges that came with it, such as climbing Mt. Everest,” explained Sarmad, overhearing their conversation.
“You climbed Mt. Everest!?” shrieked Zack.
“Yup,” answered Sarmad, cheerfully.
“Lucky,” said Zack, mournfully, his jealousy dripping from his words.
“Hey don’t let this be personal,” said Sarmad, trying to cheer him up. “I’ll get you a donut.” Zack immediately brightened up.
“All right that’s eleven, or was it ten?” he was confused.
“Ten!” lied Sarmad, instantly. “Just kidding, it’s actually eleven donuts not ten. Oh the things I do for my friends. I just practically gave it away.”
“Generosity always pays off,” said Zack, with mock wisdom.
“Wise guy,” mumbled Sarmad. He came up with an idea. “Okay, if you eradicate all the donuts, I owe you, I’ll let you climb Mt. Everest with me next time. I mean the first and last time was two years ago and I’m sure that I’m not that old. Besides I need some money otherwise Boris will bite my head off and give it to the dogs.”
Zack didn’t contemplate it for a second, “Deal.”
While those two were enjoying their conversation, Leo had gone back to the helicopter to make sure he had all the things he needed for the trip. He wondered what Boris was doing – he had gone a bit further up the island to kill time. As if complying with Leo’s wishes, Boris cut through some vines and came in view.
“It’s a nice and beautiful island – A lot like a jungle you know, but uninhabited. Did I tell you that it had been banned by the government and that we’re trespassing,” he said trying to prevent the smile that tugged on his lips.
“What!?” shouted Zack, having heard only the words ‘trespassing’ and ‘government’. He was a very responsible citizen, although he was usually mischievous, who tended to avoid any trouble with the police or such.
“Relax,” said Boris, “I was joking. Well about the trespassing thing at least. It has been banned but I pulled a few strings and got permission.”
“How’d you do it?” asked Leo, bluntly.
“I have contacts,” answered Boris.
“Who are the contacts?” said Leo, trying to avoid beating around the bush.
“God, you’re persistent. Well if you must know, then I’ll tell you,” said Boris, dramatically pausing to increase the suspense, “I know the Chief of The Army Staff.” Boris said the last part in a boastful tone.
“How nice,” Leo rolled his eyes, “and I thought you were talking about the President. Well I know many of the prisoners that used to reside in Kings Cross Prison.” He suddenly realized what he had just said. Knowing his allies, they would continue to bug him until he budged. True to Leo’s fears, they began to question him.
“How’d you know them?” Boris asked curiously.
“A reason that I don’t wish to relieve by telling you,” said Leo, shortly, remembering his haunting past that he was constantly running away from. He mentally smacked himself for telling Boris that he knew the prisoners.
“I’m sure we all would like to know about your past, Leo,” said Zack, calmly. Sarmad grinned; Leo was caught in a pickle now. There was no way that Zack and Boris would let Leo out without saying a bit of his past.
“It’s none of your business!” barked Leo.
“It is because we’re your friends. So you can either accept the fact that you’ve gotten close enough to be called a friend or you can back away and die alone,” said Sarmad, uncharacteristically sounding deep. Leo was about to say something but Boris hushed him.
“Sarmad’s right,” said Zack, supportively, “you can deny it all you want but all of us have bonded to become friends. Go on you just keep running from our claims but your heart and mind know the truth. Guys let’s leave him to ponder on what we’ve said and regret the fact that he has no shoulder to lean on.” Zack and his two friends both left, although Sarmad cast one glance at Leo and said one thing.
“If you’re done with your false claims of having no friends, and have come to terms with the bond that we have made, we’ll be right over there. And either way, come to us in thirty minutes to leave this time.” Sarmad walked away, leaving Leo behind who felt an unusual and foreign feeling to him.
Regret
Maybe Sarmad and his friends are right, maybe he has bonded with them. But as quickly as the wild thought came, it went away.
‘No,’ he thought, ‘even if my heart likes them as friends, I refuse to allow myself to succumb and lower myself to make friends with savages. They may seem friendly and kind but look at Jaguar. He was just like Sarmad – carefree and laidback. Sarmad’s like a twin brother to Jaguar and I will not let myself be used as a tool again.’

Chapter 6

Spoiler (Click to View)

Meanwhile, in a small village, thousands of miles North
“What’s happening?” a man remarked, suddenly feeling tired and almost fell down, as memories flood into his mind and guilt weighs over his conscience. The guilt that he had been carrying for years – the guilt he felt years ago and the same amount of it he feels today.
“What is it, Jaguar?” the village elder asked, with concern.
“Nothing,” answered the man called Jaguar, hurriedly. The elder looked at him, skeptically.
“Do you really think I’ll believe that?” he said.
“I said it’s nothing,” insisted Jaguar.
You can trust me, Jaguar,” said the elder, soothingly.
“It’s just that…” Jaguar hesitated, “I suddenly remembered Leo again and how I betrayed him.”
The elder looked at him, sadly. Jaguar had told him his entire story with Leo and how he had betrayed him. The man had come to the village wanting to live a life of obscurity and peace. He had searched for Leo for years but never found a trace of him.
The elder knew what had happened to Leo. A few years before Jaguar came to the village, a famous man called Hades had been murdered, and his head was found separated from his body. The prime suspect was a sixteen year old boy called Leo. The description of the boy had fit the boy that Jaguar had searched for, in vain, perfectly. And a few days before Jaguar came to the village, he had heard that the boy-turned-man had been caught and sent to trial, where he was found guilty, although many people said that there was unfairness in the trial.
The elder had never told Jaguar this as he knew that even though Leo hated him, Jaguar still treated Leo as a friend. He would have been heartbroken had he known what had happened to his former friend. Jaguar had now moved on from his past but he still occasionally went silent and felt sad.
“What do you mean? You’ve never felt tired when you’ve had a flashback,” said the Elder.
“This isn’t a flashback,” said Jaguar. “I just feel that something bad is going to happen to Leo.”
“The bond you share with your friend. It still hasn’t fizzled out, has it?” asked the Elder.
“The bond has been cut from one side,” said Jaguar, “Leo insisted that he hates me and will never open up.”
“Jaguar, my boy,” began the Elder, “Have you ever heard of Hades?”
“Yeah, I’ve heard of him,” answered Jaguar, “they say he was murdered by a boy and that after a few years the boy was caught and sent to prison.”
“Do you know who that boy was?” inquired the Elder.
“Surely you aren’t saying…?” realized Jaguar.
“I’m afraid so,” said the Elder mournfully. “The boy who was your friend is gone. He has been replaced by a cold blooded killer.”
“I refuse to believe it!” shouted Jaguar, “Leo may have turned unfriendly, but he would never murder. He would never stoop that low.”
“I’m sorry,” said the Elder.
“No!” Jaguar screamed and screamed until his lungs needed more air than they were getting. Jaguar stopped for breath. “I refuse to believe you!” He slammed his hand against the concrete floor, no doubt breaking one of his knuckles, but he didn’t care at all. He fought the pain, just as Leo had fought the pain of getting shot. A picture of Leo lying and begging for help, while Jaguar ran away and Jupiter laughed sadistically came into his mind, before all went black and he was overtaken by the black abyss.
“I’m sorry, Jaguar,” said the Elder, having knocked out the man with a chop to the neck. “Hopefully when you wake up, you will have regained your sanity.”
The wise man gazed at the landscape. “I feel that Jaguar’s time in this village has expired. I feel that it is time that he resumes his search for his friend. And I hope that he finds his light in the darkness.”
“I don’t think so, old man,” a familiar chortle was heard.
“Ah, Jupiter,” said the Elder, without turning around, “I haven’t seen you in a long time.”
“Get real, old man,” said Jupiter, his white hair still as long as it was many years ago. “I don’t know you.”
“Surely you haven’t forgotten me,” said the Elder, choosing not to comment on the irony of Jupiter calling him old. Aforementioned man peered at the Elder and came to a sudden realization.
“It’s you. Now I remember you. Now, What was your name, again?” said Jupiter, knowing it, but wanting to mess with the elderly man.
“You know it. Wanting to play mind games? Fine, I’ll play your games,” said the Elder, “my name is Sun.”
“I know, old man.” Jupiter gave one of his trademark cackles.
“So, Jupiter,” said Sun, feigning politeness and curiosity, “how has your time been at the 8th Solar?”
“It’s been great,” answered Jupiter, returning Sun’s politeness. “Thankfully, I don’t betray who I work for unlike some people.”
“I quit the 8th Solar because of its illegal activities. But enough about that,” Sun became stern. “Why are you here?”
“Is it not obvious?” Jupiter grinned, maliciously.
“Nope,” replied Sun, bluntly.
“Because, I want him,” Jupiter pointed to Jaguar’s unconscious body. “He will prove useful in bargaining with Leo. That man has become too powerful for me to take head on. I shall need him to bargain with him.”
“Too bad,” said Sun, with a grin, “Leo doesn’t care about Jaguar anymore.”
“Oh he does,” contradicted Jupiter, “he does. He still cares for his friend, but those emotions have been buried deep inside his sub-consciousness. But once he looks at the boy, he will remember everything and will do whatever it takes to retrieve him.”
“You won’t get him,” said Sun, determinedly, as he slipped into a fighting stance.
“You have two options old man,” cackled Jupiter. “Give me the boy peacefully, or fight against a hundred battle tanks and two thousand soldiers who are getting ready to fight you, if you don’t give the boy to me.” The threat was actually a bluff but Sun didn’t need to know that.
The former member of 8th Solar hesitated. Jupiter had beaten him. While he wanted to take care of Jaguar, he cared more about the innocent villagers, who had gathered around the area, and were secretly watching. The poor man had no choice but to give Jaguar to him.
“He is yours.” Sun had never felt so guilty in his life except for maybe whenever he thought about all the innocent people he had killed during his time in the 8th Solar. Jupiter calmly walked up and went past Sun to pick up his bounty. A military helicopter that had been circling above the village landed, and Jupiter, victoriously, put the man inside of it.
“Make sure he doesn’t wake up until we’re at headquarters,” he ordered the pilot, who gave him a two fingered salute. Jupiter didn’t go inside the helicopter yet.
“Leave!” pleaded Sun, “We have given you what you want. Now leave my village in peace.”
“Of course,” said Jupiter, as two airplanes circled above the village. He took out a walkie-talkie and spoke into it. “Leave them in pieces.”
“Why?” Sun asked, furiously.
“Old Man,” snorted Jupiter. He spoke into the walkie-talkie again, “Kill them! Kill them all!”
With that, Jupiter got onto the helicopter, and asked the pilot to take them to 8th Solar HQ. As he left the two airplanes shot the village with missiles and the village caught fire. Jupiter was delighted to hear the frantic cries of pain from the burning village, as the airplanes and his helicopter flew away.
“Soon, I will have my revenge on the boy,” Jupiter cackled maliciously, and with abhorrence. “He has no idea what prison has done to me.” Little did he know, Leo knew what it had done to him, for he could relate. Prison had carved Leo to what he was today, but Jupiter didn’t know that, and he didn’t care. He only cared for one thing, and he only desired that one thing.
Revenge

Rest Of the Story:
Instead of putting it in separate chapters, I'm putting the rest of the story in one big spoiler. Forgive me if this causes any problems with you, but it truly is difficult to put a large story in spoilers.

Spoiler (Click to View)

At the island where the trip to the Past was about to happen
Boris had been sitting on a moss covered rock. He appeared idle, but he was actually deep in thought, calculating the probabilities of surviving the trip. By his estimates they were slim, but he never showed them. He was often considered the leader of the quartet, as Leo couldn’t be bothered, and while Zack could be responsible he was usually a simple prankster along with Sarmad. He knew that if he showed fear, then panic might spread among his allies and that would be disastrous. Finally he stood up. His comrades looked up at him, knowing that the time had arrived.
“Oh well here goes everything,” said the secretly frightened professor, in almost a whisper as he enlarged his Time Machine. It was in a shape of a sphere and its final coating was blue. It was rather large and all four men could easily fit inside it in addition to their baggage. In a large font, in front of the entrance, was written:
‘We shall be victorious.’
Zack looked at the group, wondering who would’ve written such a thing. His eyes scanned through each of the men who seemed to be minding their own business. Sarmad was whistling and was casting a thoughtful gaze at the Time Machine. Boris took out a recorder. He wanted to record how painful the experience of Time Traveling would be. Leo was silently looking around and scanning the area.
“This will either be our rise to fame,” said Zack, solemnly, “or our tomb.” Everyone shivered upon hearing this from Zack. Sarmad, upon noticing the eerie silence, decided to lighten things up.
“Okay, guys,” he said, in a singsong voice, “let’s forget about our fears and just hope for the best; after all, you know the saying, ‘the only thing we have to fear – is fear itself’” Everyone smiled at hearing the rather pathetic attempt of Sarmad trying to prevent panic. Leo stood away from everyone else and his eyes were shut. He was meditating to mentally prepare himself for all the potential dangers of the future, or rather, the past.
“Okay, Zack, do we have our guns?” asked Sarmad. Zack simply nodded. Just as they were about to leave, Sarmad’s cell phone began to ring.
“What the heck?” he said, upon reading the name. “Goodness me, this is bad.”
“Who is it?” asked Zack, intrigued at who this magical person was if he could make Sarmad shake in his boots like that. He would love to have some ammo on Sarmad for the next time he teased him.
“I-It’s the devil reincarnate,” stammered Sarmad. Zack’s eyes widened and his mouth fell open, comically.
“What in the world are you talking about?” he demanded. Sarmad didn’t answer and simply picked up his phone after hesitating for a few seconds.
“Big brother, where are you?” shouted a voice from the phone. Sarmad covered his ears in pain.
“God, Theon,” he said, “you know about my sensitive hearing.”
“Big brother, where are you?” the voice shouted from the phone again. This time Sarmad had had enough and he shouted back.
“Theon, I am at a friend’s house and will not be home till later,” he lied. He didn’t like lying but he knew that this was necessary. Theon, not being very gullible didn’t buy it.
“The truth,” he demanded, in a loud tone.
Sarmad hesitated, before he simply hung up. He knew how determined Theon could be, and that he would definitely never leave him alone until he forced the truth out of him. He heaved a sigh of relief and was about to block Theon from his phone, when his brother called again. Sarmad slowly began to turn red as he accepted the phone call.
“Leave me alone, Theon!” he shouted.
“No,” answered Theon, obstinately, from the line, “Where are you?”
“What if I told you, that Boris, Zack, Leo and I were about to attempt to travel through time to see dinosaurs, even though there would be slim chances of our survival?” asked Sarmad, trying to sound sarcastic. A pause was made, as Sarmad let the information sink in. He knew that Theon would never ever believe him.
“I believe you,” said Theon, shockingly.
“I knew you would say – wait what?” he said, not able to believe that Theon had actually brought it.
“That professor, what’s his name – Boris, is mad enough to make anything like that even if it defies the laws of Science. Knowing him, he could easily create a Time Machine. Big brother, Boris may be a brilliant scientist, but he is mad. I say that you should stay away from him,” theorized Theon. Sarmad was initially horrified, but now he was roaring with laughter at Theon’s rather accurate description of Boris.
“Theon, I think that you really hit the nail,” praised Sarmad through the phone. Theon immediately brightened up at the praise he was getting from Sarmad. He really looked up to his brother and admired him as if he were a famous celebrity or something like that.
“Thanks, big bro,” said Theon, “I believe you, when you say that you are traveling through time, but please be careful.”
“Thanks, little brother, I promise I’ll be careful,” said Sarmad as he hung up. “Gosh, I sure am lucky that he let me live. I was afraid that he would continue to chew me out for a few more hours at least.”
Zack was trying to hold his laughter when he was listening to him but eventually exploded with laughter. Leo was smirking, but Boris had a confused look.
“Why is Zack laughing?” he asked Sarmad. This only caused Zack to laugh louder. Sarmad knew the reason Zack looked like an idiotic clown, but he wanted some support, so he simply shrugged and gave no reply. Boris remained confused.
“Hey, you try living with Theon,” said Sarmad to Zack, when Boris wasn’t looking. “By the way, Theon accurately described Boris as a brilliant but mad scientist and told me to stay away from him.” This only caused Zack to laugh louder. Eventually he managed to cease his laughter.
“Yeah, but you’re what, twenty years older than the little tyke? Or was it thirty? I lost track of your age, Sarmad,” he commented, bursting into laughter again.
“Only fifteen. I tell you he’s a little demon,” said Sarmad. He began imitating Theon and said in a high pitched tone, “Big brother do this, big brother do that.”
“Does he like to annoy you so much that you fear the fact that he may call you or it just naturally in his nature? Because if so, I doubt that you’ll ever be able to change that trait of the child,” asked Zack.
Sarmad visibly hesitated. “No he doesn’t mean wrong. He always means well but he’s thirteen years old. He needs to learn how to be independent. Although he is a nice boy and I couldn’t ask for a better brother.” Zack nodded, understanding. Boris was looking very pensive and looked very upset during all this. He was listening to all this rather gloomily. He looked up.
‘I wonder what happened to my brother,” he thought.
*Flashback*
“I’m sorry, brother,” pleaded Boris.
“Sorry won’t heal these wounds, Boris,” answered his brother. “Goodbye and get ready because I will get my revenge, sooner or later.”
*End Flashback*
“Here we go,” he said, suddenly as he typed in the keyboard ‘Age 886.’ He accessed the Cyber-drive from the Time Machine’s computer.
He began the countdown to leave. When he was on 10, everyone put away their stuff and got ready for the trip. When he hit 5, everyone braced themselves and got ready for their possible demise. When the number hit zero, the courageous professor hit the lever to use the Cyber-drive and everyone was waiting for the probable pain which for some odd reason, never came.
Nothing happened. Sarmad was ready to burst with laughter, but deep inside, although he didn’t want to admit it, he was very upset.
‘Why isn’t it working?’ he wondered.
A few more seconds passed when very suddenly and abruptly, the Time Machine started shaking violently and they had to fight their legs wish to sit down. They had trouble to stand up, talk and even stay conscious. The pain was unbearable for the humans and they each clutched their head and would have collapsed had they not had an amazing amount of willpower. The pain they felt was indescribable. Each of them were mumbling prayers and struggled to stay conscious.
“I’ll get you for this, Boris,” said Sarmad, as he fell down to his knees but still remained conscious. Slowly however he drifted into unconsciousness.
“Sorry, old pal,” replied Boris, struggling to talk.
Leo was struggling to continue to stay up. He had never felt anything so painful and he simply wanted to roll over and die. However his will-power and stubbornness refused to allow him to collapse so easily. He was getting the hang of it until Zack shouted in pain and made him lose concentration. He fell down and drifted into unconsciousness. But before he did, he looked around and noticed everyone apart from the professor already unconscious.
“The Time Machine is shaking rapidly,” Boris was recording, “everyone else has collapsed and given in to unconsciousness. I myself don’t know how long I can stay conscious. Whoever may be listening to this in the future, know this – I deserve recognition for being awake for so long. I… can’t… stay… any… longer.”
The Time Machine continued to shake and in an instant a portal opened. The portal was in a mysterious color and it looked dazzling and enchanting. It was luminous and incandescent – radiant. For some reason it seemed as if all of the colors were in it. No one could actually describe it. Each color appeared in it and an instant later was replaced by a different color. Boris noticed it and immediately realized that he had successfully created a rip in the fabric of time and space. All his life he had been fascinated by the prospect of travelling thorough time and now after years of dreaming he had successfully created rip in the fabric of time and space.
“When I wake up, I will see dinosaurs,” he smiled, before losing consciousness, as the recorder continued to beep, monotonously.
Little did the men know that the spherical Time Machine had entered the rip was going through a pool of portals similar to the one they had used, in which people were shown moving, talking, hunting, and many other things. Some of them were wearing old fashioned clothes and some were wearing odd clothes that looked as if they were of the future. Even unknown animals from the Stone Age were visible. Apparently all of these portals led to an alternate timeline. However The Time Machine stopped in front of only one of the portals in which a lush green jungle and dinosaurs were shown, and entered it.
After entering the portal a new environment was shown. There was a forest, and one could hear the roars of dinosaurs in the distance.
When the quartet regained consciousness they all got out of the Time Machine wondering what made them agree to travel back in time. Sarmad in particular was having trouble believing that he had just done what no man had done before. He immediately began imagining how his name would go down in the history books.
They saw they had ended in a lush green, beautiful, jungle. From the distance roars of dinosaurs could be heard. Sarmad was very happy in the inside, although on the outside, he frowned. He noticed Boris staring at a dinosaur’s eggs. Leo was looking around at the scenery in surprise, although the man managed to hide it. Zack was looking intently at Boris.
Sarmad noticed how everybody was so solemn and serious, and decided to play a prank on Boris to lighten the mood and sooth everybody with comic relief. He smiled in an impish manner, and pounced on the unsuspecting professor who gave an exclamation of surprise. To Sarmad’s surprise, Zack had also done the same thing, presumably to cheer everybody up.
“Let me go!” shouted Boris, reaching for his gun, not knowing who had attacked him.
“Relax, professor,” reassured Leo, as both Sarmad and Zack got off Boris’s back.
“What do you mean relax?!” said the professor, frantically. “Where is the brute that attacked me?”! Sarmad laughed at the professor who was still confused, while Zack smiled at how absentminded he could be. Boris still looked confused.
“They pounced on you as a prank,” explained Leo with a smirk, as he saw Boris slowly turn red with anger. “What I don’t know is how you both pounced on him. I mean you didn’t signal each other, or else I would have seen you.” Both Sarmad and Zack looked at each other and shrugged.
“I guess great minds think alike,” remarked Zack. He gazed at Boris with alarm. Boris was now gradually turning purple.
“You big brutes!” he exploded, his face looking like a turnip, “I give you so much and this is how you repay me.”
Sarmad felt guilty as he saw that Boris was honestly upset with what they had done. Most of their jokes were teasing and so but now that he thought about it, he realized that they had never attacked each other, that is – until now. Zack also looked genuinely guilty. They just wanted to cheer everybody up, although that plan seemed to have failed, miserably. Although they knew that they had done wrong, they did not want to be on the wrong end of Boris’s wrath. The twosome looked at Leo for support who cast a hardened look at the two of them.
“Boris’s is right,” said Leo, coldly, “you both have gone too far this time. I think we should punish the both of them and this time seriously so that they finally learn their place and stop their idiotic pranks.”
Boris nodded. “If, or rather, when we get back,” he said, as the color slowly returned to his face, “and if you want to live with me, you will have to sleep on the couch, skip dessert and eat simple rations as food until I feel that you two are honestly better people. Furthermore if you both misbehave further I will ban you from my house, permanently. So Zack can travel half of the world to get to Florida and might I add that I will not pay for that, and Sarmad can enjoy living in the streets or with Zack. Whereas Leo can stay with me for however long he wishes.”
Sarmad’s, Zack’s and Leo’s eyes bulged. Boris had never threatened to kick any of them out of the house. They had really messed it up good this time. Both Sarmad and Zack felt very guilty and stared at the ground, while muttering an apology.
“Good,” said Boris. “Now Zack, look at that unusual creature over there.” He pointed to a small lizard type creature that was gliding across the ground.
“Oh my god,” said Zack astonished, having never seen anything like that creature. “What is that?”
“Get the camera out,” ordered Boris, in a tone of pure authority. Leo hurriedly took it out not wanting to be on the bad side of Boris, especially after what Sarmad and Zack had done.
“Now then,” Boris further continued, taking out some sort of radar from his rucksack. “It seems that this timeline includes dinosaurs and we are currently a few years before the war of Athens and Sparta. There are plenty of Persians and other civilizations at their golden age as well. Interesting – we are in a timeline in which the golden ages of Greece, Persia, Rome, the dinosaurs and even the Aryans, among others are all taking place right now.”
Boris’s companions looked as if their eyes could pop out of their sockets any minute. They were honestly shocked, at the success of their Time Travel and at the fact that such a timeline could actually exist.
“I think this timeline should be known as The Golden Timeline,” suggested Sarmad, recovering from his shock. Boris nodded in agreement, albeit rather coldly.
“Before we move forward, I have a question,” said Zack, in a quiet voice, still not able to talk to Boris with full confidence. Upon receiving a nod from the professor, he continued, “How are so many empires able to exist, simultaneously? I mean, won’t the empires have conflicts that wouldn’t allow them to live in harmony?”
“Good question,” said Boris, his mind racing as he searched for an answer. This was a question that actually and truly stumped him. After a few minutes of thinking, he could only come up with one answer. “The only plausible explanation is that they have made a peace treaty.”
“You’re wrong,” contradicted Leo. “Don’t you think that it is possible that in this timeline, the planet itself is far larger than the one in which we live in? That’s why so many empires may be able to exist – the planet is large enough to give them all large chunks of land to live in.”
“Good point,” agreed Boris. “That is, in fact, the most likely answer to your question, Zack. Now then, picture time, gentlemen.”
They took a large number of unique pictures of the forest from all sides. They snapped pictures of birds, animals, eggs, and anything interesting they could find. Quietly and anxiously they started walking to a random path.
“I hope you have turned off the flash in your camera, Leo,” said Zack, earnestly.
“I have,” said Leo, shortly.
“Leo can I talk to you?” asked Boris. Leo grunted in reply. “Alone.” He eyed Sarmad and Zack. Leo nodded. After reaching a place where they were out of hearing zone, Boris turned to Leo.
“Why have you actually joined us and put your own life at risk?” he asked.
“Why do you want to know?”
“So I know that my allies are not here for a selfish purpose.”
“Why didn’t you ask earlier?”
“No real reason.”
“Fair enough, Boris. I have nothing to do in our time, except play shooting matches with Sarmad. If he dies, my whole life will be tarnished. I am here to make sure he stays alive and if he does die, then I will live here in this time for the rest of my life, as I will have nothing to do in my own time. My life has been nothing but trash ever since my father died and left me alone. I was about to be adopted to a creature, who murdered my father. And do you know what I did to him? I murdered him, and I never regret that.” Boris was shocked, as Leo told some of his mysterious past, to him.”
“When I met Sarmad, he was so innocent and care-free, yet he was so competitive in our matches. I got a purpose in life again. Don’t get me wrong, he isn’t a friend. Like I said, I don’t need friends. But if he dies, then I will have nothing to do in life. Once I learnt that he was traveling back in time and that his life was at risk, I didn’t need to think twice, and immediately asked you to arrange for place for me as well. Thanks, by the way, for that. ”
Boris simply nodded, touched by his words and the two went back to the troublesome duo. Sarmad noticed them coming and gave them a knowing grin, but didn’t say anything.
‘Did he hear us?” wondered Boris, casting a look at Leo whose face was completely blank, as if he didn’t have a care in the world.
“That was an interesting conversation, you had,” said Sarmad, smiling. “I’m flattered at what you think of me, Leo.” Leo gave him a glare that not even the worst of wrong-doers could imitate. Sarmad cowered down in fear for a few seconds before regaining his confidence and standing boldly. He was about to say something when…
Suddenly a loud and quivering roar, that could have shaken the whole world apart, was heard. Correctly interpreting it as the cry of a dinosaur Boris took action and immediately shouted, loudly, “Quick! Hide!”
Sarmad climbed a large tree, with a lot of agility, and stayed hidden in the leaves, much to the disapproval of a squirrel living nearby. Boris hid in a Hedge bush, although the sharp, but not harmful, spikes hurt. Leo hid behind the trunk of a tree, and Zack took shelter in a freezing cold cave, almost invisible by vines.
Stomping its way to where the group was hiding, a Tyrannosaurus Rex sniffed the air around it. It could smell at least four unidentified creatures. He had never smelt a similar scent.
“Quick take a photo, Leo,” said Zack hurriedly.
“I’m working on it,” said Leo, raising the camera to eye level. He waited for the dinosaur to look away so he could snap a picture. When the dinosaur looked away, Leo quickly took the opportunity to take a picture but the moment he took the picture, the Tyrannosaurus Rex turned around. Leo could have sworn that he saw something similar to a vindictive smile.
“Grr!” it growled, unpleasantly.
Bang-bang!
“I can defend myself!” said Leo, his voice showing no fear – only courage and bravery. He was shooting the ferocious monster with his gun. “If I have to kill that darn brute to save myself, I will. I understand this dinosaur’s actions. It wishes to have food. Just as we kill fish, they want to eat man. But I’m sorry, because I will defend myself and my allies as we have a mission to accomplish.”
Leo’s ace shooting knocked the fierce carnivore of his feet, and it fell down, possibly dead! Everyone except for Zack, who didn’t know whether or not to come out, came out of their hiding places. Boris looked at the dinosaur and then gazed at Leo. After a few moments, he began to softly clap. Sarmad followed the professor’s clapping and his eyes were full of admiration, respect, and even a hint of envy.
Leo grinned at his rival, knowing that he had scored some points on a bet they had made, earlier. Sarmad frowned as he remembered the bet, knowing that the wager was set rather high and he needed to get some points. He was about to commence a friendly wrestle with Leo, when the Tyrannosaurus slowly rose, clearly in pain, and growled, angrily. Leo was about to shoot it, with his gun but before he could do so, Sarmad shot it at its chest.
“That’s more points for me because I scored a death,” he said, with a grin. Leo frowned, but didn’t say anything, while Boris and Zack, who had just come from the cave, chuckled.
“It’s been an hour and we’ve already been attacked by a dinosaur,” muttered professor Boris, to himself. “Take a picture of this dinosaur, Leo. This photo will provide us with more money than Sarmad’s yearly earnings.” Leo frowned once again, but he took out their camera and took a few pictures of the creature.
Sarmad was getting bored with the entire picture-taking, and he longed for some excitement. However he knew that, like always, Boris would not allow him to go and look for a thrill, or danger as Boris called it.
“I’m going to the Time Machine, whether you like it, or not,” he muttered, under his breath. He was unaware that Leo had heard him, and had pricked his ears immediately. When his allies weren’t looking, Sarmad slipped out of the path and went to the direction of the Time Machine, which Boris had quite honestly forgotten to revert to its original sphere form. Leo had noticed what Sarmad was doing, however he did not say anything, as he knew that despite his immaturity, Sarmad was sensible enough to take care of himself.
Instead of telling Boris where Sarmad had gone, he looked up at the sky and observed the flying dinosaurs. They were unaware that they were being watched, and continued to look for food. Suddenly, one of them halted and looked directly towards Leo. He could have sworn that he saw a sadistic smile on the dinosaur’s face. It charged towards him with its large, sharp claws pointing directly at him.
Leo did not make any move, but one of his hands was safely resting at his gun’s hilt. Both Zack and Boris suddenly noticed what was happening, and were going to shout at Leo to get out of its way, or at least shoot it, but to their astonishment, no voice came out of their mouth.
They were petrified with fear for their friend’s safety. They wanted to grab their respective guns and shoot the brute, that was attacking their friend but their feet were frozen to the ground. The two noticed that they were shivering with fear. To them everything was going slowly. They noticed the dinosaur with its claws reaching for Leo. It almost seemed as if it was drooling, as it was looking at its prey. The men knew that it was too late for Leo and that his inevitable hour had arrived.
To their astonishment the dinosaur stopped just before it hit Leo. It whimpered in fear of the man. Leo calmly passed his terrified and shocked friends, and took out a few, large chunks of meat from his bag and fed the dinosaur.
“How’d you do that?” asked Zack, once the dinosaur had flown away. Leo simply showed him a jagged and sharp piece of glass.
“While very brave when they think that they are winning a fight, animals often flee the moment they feel scared or threatened. I suppose that the same thing counts for dinosaurs. It was afraid of Leo, because he held something that could severely hurt them. He got that piece of glass from the ground, I’ll warrant,” explained Boris, realizing the ingenious plan Leo had come up with. But now that he thought about it, he became conscious of the fact that only Leo could come up with such a plan, as he knew so much about wildlife.
“But why didn’t he outright kill it?” asked Zack.
“I guess he just didn’t feel like it,” answered Boris, shrugging. Zack nodded, as he remembered that Leo preferred to refrain from killing wild animals, unless absolutely necessary, such as for food, or, self-defense.
Suddenly Boris’s watch beeped and began to say in a robotic voice, “WARNING.”
“Why on Earth is your watch constantly giving us a warning?!” said Zack, looking around frantically.
“It’s a transmission from the Time Machine,” said Boris looking at his watch. “Someone or something is messing with it!”
“What?” said Zack, “but that’s impossible we are the only humans over here. And didn’t you resize it to its cube form?”
“I had forgotten. And yes we are the only humans, if you exclude the natives, that is,” remarked Boris. He looked around and turned as pale as sheet.
“What’s the matter, you look as if you’ve seen a ghost?” said Zack.
“Where’s Sarmad?” said Boris, releasing his fears.
“He went to the Time Machine,” replied Leo, calmly.
“It might be him who’s messing with it,” suggested Zack.
“Well in that case, we’re going too,” said Boris, determinedly.
They all departed, and began to follow Boris’s tracking device on his watch. They arrived to see a familiar face lying down unconscious outside the Time Machine.
Sarmad’s hair was messed up and there was blood oozing from his hand. His eyes were shut and he wasn’t moving at all. One could see that he had been in a fight. Apparently his gun was not in sight either, but the trio did not notice that, yet. Upon noticing his motionless state, everybody feared that they might have lost a good friend. No one noticed the people that were secretly watching them.
“Darn it. Is he alive?” demanded Zack, angrily. He didn’t want to lose his friend – Sarmad was the one person, who could relate with him, especially since they were so similar in their personalities.
“I hope so,” replied Boris, glumly. He heaved a sigh of relief, as he touched his wrist, and then touched his chest, and listened for thumping. For a few seconds, nothing could be heard, and he began to fear for the worst.
Then, an ever so slight, throb could be heard. A few more idle seconds passed, before he heard it, once again. “It’s all right his heart is beating, and throbbing, although it is faint.”
“What was he doing here?” demanded Zack, to nobody in particular.
“I know why he was here,” said Leo in a guilty voice.
“Why?” demanded Zack.
“He was looking for some excitement,” answered Leo.
“Why didn’t you tell us,” said Boris, accusingly.
“I couldn’t be bothered,” said Leo, looking very guilty. The two men glared at poor Leo. They noticed that the moonlight of the night sky was approaching and the light of the blazing and fiery Sun was fleeing.
The darkness covered the light of the day, until it was very hard for anyone to see more than a single kilometer ahead. Nothing could be seen or heard, except the occasional hoot of an owl, hunting for dinner, or, dinosaurs roaming, some way off. Everything seemed still and quite…
…Until, the group of men heard a rough voice full of hate. “Hands up!”

“Who in the heck are you?” demanded Zack, shocked and astounded, to hear somebody.
“I said, hands up” repeated that hateful voice, once again
Everyone put their hands up and quietly surrendered, not quite knowing who this person was, and what he wanted from them. And since the man appeared to have a gun, they supposed that either, the timeline already produced arms. Or, the man was from their own timeline. But, surely, that was impossible.
“And not a word,” said another voice. “Shoot them if you want, Giro. They are of no use to us. Although I don’t deny, that we could use some new recruits.”
The men felt as if they were being examined, but they couldn’t be sure. They shivered at the clear venom and anger in both of the voices. Whoever these unknown people were, they sure weren’t friendly. They heard the loud footsteps of one of them leaving. The man was clearly taking his time, as he walked away carelessly, trying to intimidate the men, and reminding them that they were at his mercy.
“Who in the world are you?” yelled Sarmad, who had regained consciousness “What do you want from us?”
“We shall kill you,” said the man, who was left, known as Giro, “And return to our own country and give them original photographs of dinosaurs. We would be legends. And no one will ever hear from you again. After all there is not a soul here to witness your demise.” He paused expecting them to say something.
“Boris, your brother is with us today.” Boris’s eyes widened, as he recalled memories of a particular horrifying accident. “He has given you the opportunity to live by joining us. You should be happy that he is granting you mercy despite of what you did to him in the past. He has also given Leo the chance to live by joining us. We have observed your shooting matches with Sarmad. We could use an ally with your level of shooting. However the rest of them die immediately. What are your answers gentlemen?”
“No,” said both Boris and Leo together “Never.” Giro was amazed at their loyalty to their friends. Instead of saving their own skins, they chose to stay with their allies. However he regained his composure, almost instantly.
“Pity,” he said, with a snicker, as he carelessly shot at the sky. “Then die.” He hesitated, not wanting to kill potential recruits. “Are you sure?”

“We’ve no doubts, and I am not ashamed to say that I will never, ever, join a creep like you. Even if my brother is with you,” said Boris, with dignity.
“Yeah, we’ve no doubts on this, at all,” added Leo.
Giro began to sweat. Leo noticed this and smirked. Giro was near desperation. A part of him wanted to kill them all, and get done with it, but another part of him wanted to keep them alive so they could work for him.
“Okay, fine here’s the deal Boris and Leo join us, and the rest of them may live, however they shall be left here,” he said.
‘Hmm,’ thought Boris. ‘If I join them, everyone will be safe, but somehow, I doubt they will keep their end of the bargain. Besides how will my friends manage to live a decent life in a time like this, especially if they don’t know the basics of survival?’
“I accept,” said Leo, surprisingly after pondering for a few minutes. Giro smirked, knowing that they had just got one amazing recruit.
“I refuse, I would rather lose my life instead of join you losers,” said Boris.
“Wait a minute, they’ll be allowed to live, right?” asked Leo.
“Yes, indeed” answered Giro “all of them accept for Boris. He shall be killed, merely to please his brother. ”
“Fine,” agreed Leo. “Sorry professor but losing one of us is better than all of us dying.”
“You treacherous, sniveling, lying, coward. How could you sell our away our lives, just to save your own skin?” yelled Sarmad, who had been quiet the whole time. Zack also shouted oaths at Leo.
To their astonishment, instead of shouting back, or explain his actions, they saw Leo wink at them and he was also murmuring something under his breath, that they could not hear. However this little action gave them a small spark of hope.
Giro ordered Leo to tie up the men and he reluctantly obliged. He whispered something that sounded like a curse but nonetheless tied them, somewhat loosely. Giro started to leave and Leo simply followed him, but, before they could leave, Leo felt a revolver brush against the back of his head. Leo froze in horror, and his blood went cold, with fear and astonishment.
“Where are your loyalties, Leo?” said the voice of Giro’s comrade.
“Malince, what are you doing?” asked Giro.
“Silence!” snapped the voice, which turned out to be of a man named Malince. “Why did you tie them so loosely? Go back and tie them roughly.”
Giro then understood. It seemed that Leo still had a soft spot for his former allies and so had given them all a chance to escape. Leo reluctantly returned to his former comrades and tied them as roughly as possible. He was cursing himself. He should have tied them loosely, but not so loosely that Malince had noticed it. After one, last look at his former comrades, Leo began to walk away.
“That’s it?!” shouted Sarmad. “How could you betray us, just like that? Are you turning your back on your friends? We pledged our allegiance to each other, and said that we would protect each other if it cost us our lives. Yet here you are breaking our friendship, which we worked so hard to create, without another thought.”
“Some friend you are,” mocked Zack, feeling more upset that Leo had betrayed them than he showed on the outside.
“Get it through your thick heads, that I’m not your friend,” shouted Leo. He took a deep breath. He was going to have to make it look realistic, that he had betrayed them. “I was using you all along. I hate you. You’re nothing but pawns to me, and the whole world was the Chess board for my game. I never liked you all. You all can burn in hell, for all I care. All the things that I said about myself being attached to Sarmad via some sort of bond – all of it was a simple lie. And do you know why I did it? I did it just for my own amusement.” Leo remembered the laugh that Jupiter had mastered, and tried his best to imitate it.
And he did – he gave a most despicable and hate-deserving cackle, as Sarmad, Zack and Boris stared at him in horror, and dismay. “So tell me – do you still think that I’m a good friend of yours? Do tell.” He gave another wicked cackle.
A few tears dripped from Sarmad’s eyes, while Boris and Zack attempted to hold in theirs. The former clenched his tied-up fist so hard that a few drops of blood slipped out of the fist, like cunning shadows. He would’ve slammed it down onto the floor, had he been able to. But knowing that that was impossible, he chose merely to bow his head down.
“So this is how it is?” said Sarmad, dully. “If that’s how it is going to be, then why wait? Just kill me now! You’ve become a demon – a coward, who has no honor, or self-respect. All that time we spent together – hunting, fishing, sparring, among other things – are they all nothing to you?”
“Correct,” answered Leo, with an evil smile.
Sarmad seemed to droop even more, if that were possible, as he realized the truth – the Leo that they knew was long gone – consumed by this demon, that had possessed him.
“Now, then,” said Leo, imitating one of Jupiter’s cackles, “it is time for me to take my leave. Do you cowards have anything to say, before we kill you?”
“Go burn yourself,” shouted Zack, who had been silent for so long, as Boris gave a menacing glare, which had so often made people cower back in fear.
“I would treat the person, who holds your life in his hands, much more civilly and nicely,” spoke up Giro. He gave an exaggerated sigh, “But, I suppose we’ll just leave.” He and Leo got up, and ready to leave.
Before Leo could leave, though, Malince grabbed his shoulder, roughly. His eyes went to Sarmad and then back on Leo. Leo looked on in horror, as he realized what he was being commanded to do by that devil of Malince .
Murmuring an apology that no one heard, Leo reluctantly walked over to Sarmad and gave him a harsh kick. His eyes clearly showed concern but he continued to kick Sarmad.
Sarmad was feeling unimaginable pain. Not physical, but emotional pain. He was feeling great sorrow at the fact that Leo, the person he once considered a friend, even though Leo often denied this, was beating him so very harshly and to him it seemed that Leo was enjoying this, although Leo’s eyes were slightly showing the utmost concern.
In his sorrow at Leo, Sarmad began imagining that he saw traces of a sadistic smile on Leo’s face and that Leo was enjoying, beating Sarmad, ever so harshly. Both Malince and Giro looked on with approval and enjoyment but they failed to notice the hidden message that Leo was creating on the sand with his other foot. They simply shrugged it off as an idle habit of the man.
Once Leo was done beating the man he once called a comrade, he began to walk away.
“Well done, Leo,” congratulated Malince .
“I didn’t think you had it in you,” agreed Giro. When Leo did not reply and continued to walk, Malince grabbed him and shook him with fury, “Look at me when I talk to you!” he shouted.
“Very well!” said Leo, nodding his head, although his eyes were full of sadness. With that, the trio walked away.
“Say Boris, look at this,” whispered Zack, in case the men were still nearby. Boris dragged himself to where Zack was sitting, with great discomfort. His eyes widened to the size of dinner plates as he looked at the sand.
“Sarmad, come here,” he whispered, rather loudly. Sarmad also dragged himself to where the two sat and he was shocked beyond words when he saw what was written there. His teal colored eyes that were down in the dumps, a few minutes ago were now shining with happiness and hope. There on the ground were a few words clearly imprinted by Leo’s foot,
‘Sorry for hurting you. I am currently thinking of a plan to get us out of this time and save us from the clutches of our enemies. Sorry for everything.
Leo’
The trio could have jumped with sheer joy had their feet not been tied. After reading the words a few more times, Boris erased them in fear of Malince and Giro discovering them.
After waiting a few hours for Leo to return, Sarmad and his comrades began to grow very impatient. Boris was constantly cursing and repeatedly claiming that he would rather die than starve in the wretched timeline they were stuck in.
“Patience,” said Sarmad “I am sure Leo has some sort of plan. Well I hope at least.”
“I’m starting to doubt the fact if Leo is with us or not,” said Zack, sensibly, surprising everyone.
“What makes you say so?” asked Sarmad, not showing the rage he felt when Zack suggested that Leo had actually betrayed them.
“Well, it’s been a few hours since Leo left. Maybe it was all a ploy by Giro, Malince and Leo to torture us by giving us false hope,” answered Zack.
“I doubt that even a traitor could stoop that low, especially one like Leo who treasures his honor as if it’s his life,” said Boris, simply.
“If you say so,” said Zack with a shrug.
“Wait guys. Give me a minute. Let’s use our heads properly for once,” said the thoughtful Boris. He paused when everyone stared at him, intently.
When he didn’t speak, Sarmad said, “Out with it already, the suspense might kill me,” said Sarmad, impatiently.
“How in the world did those people even get over here in this time?” questioned Boris, ignoring Sarmad’s remark.
“I have a theory,” said Sarmad. Everybody looked at him, with a serious expression on each of their faces. “I bet one of us has been working for those fiends all along.”
“No way,” said Zack, believing that they were good friends.

“Really?” said Sarmad “In that case I suppose you should know how they came here.

Meanwhile with Leo
Leo was asked by them to give them the Cyber-drive’s instruction manual that had been created by Boris himself. However as he tried to look for the manual, he luckily found an extra gun in the baggage. The men had taken his initial gun but they were not smart enough to look in the baggage.
‘Aha,’ he thought, with a smirk, ‘Now we are going to have some fun.’
"Where are they," demanded Malince . He was a man who lacked patience. "Do you have them or not?"
"Here," said Leo holding a sheaf of papers. He looked as if he were about to give them, but instead he took out a revolver "Now hands up.
"Now you’re going to tell me something with complete honesty. If I find a trace of a fib in your answer I will shoot you without hesitation. I have no problem eradicating scum like you from the face of our beloved planet,” he continued “how did you get here?"
He was oblivious to the fact that behind him was none other than the cunning, crafty and currently angry Giro holding a gun and was thinking of all the terrible and painful things he would like to do to the man whom he believed to be the devil’s incarnate.
"If you think that my ally is going to speak you are in for a big surprise," said Giro surprising Leo who froze as he realized that he was outnumbered. "Drop your weapon, if you know what’s good for you." Leo instantly dropped the weapon.
"Thanks for the papers," said Malince , picking up Leo’s weapon, "I hope you enjoy living in this land. But don’t worry, I’m sure that the dinosaurs will keep you company. I hope you enjoy the end of your life and I promise that it will hurt. What of Giro and I? We are leaving with your Time Machine." With two sick and twisted laughs, the two turned around to see Sarmad.
"Surprised to see me, gentlemen?" said, Sarmad in a rather funny accent, while his allies laughed. When Zack had managed to drag himself to a sharp point of a large rock, the others had been as happy as a group of kings having a fantastic feast and they all had managed to get free.
"Tie them as tightly as they tied us and tighter if possible," said Boris, grimly. Sarmad grinned and went to tie them. He loved to play with ropes and threads, so he knew how to tie a rope very tightly, so as to make sure that they do not get free at all.
"Guys," said Leo, apologetically "I'm sorry for hurting all of you, both mentally and physically, but it was all part of my plan. I wanted to wrap them all under the bag."
"Well he didn't actually betray us," said Zack "I accept, sorry for doubting you.
It seemed everyone accepted his apology, although all of them did so grudgingly, especially Sarmad, who was still upset at how much Leo had insulted him and beat him, when he was pretending to work for Giro and Malince.
It was at this moment that a seed of hatred was planted in his head, and deep inside his sub-consciousness an eye opened.
*Deep inside Sarmad’s subconscious*
“He’s progressing better than I thought. It won’t be long until I’m capable of taking over his body. I just have to wait until he loses consciousness.”
*Returning to real world*
The men questioned Malince and Giro, who obstinately and adamantly did not say a word about who they worked for, and how they came to this time. They all went to the hidden cave, which was cleverly concealed by the vines where Zack had hid. It was a dark cave and they all talked in darkness however that just made it more thrilling to the men as if they were children.
Then Sarmad said, "They will not say how they got here.
"So," said Boris "I too agree with Sarmad someone is a traitor.
"But we are all best friends," protested Zack. “Leo can be a grouch, occasionally, though.” He was about to say more when Leo gave him the fiercest glare he could muster. Zack then shut up and just listened.
"We will vote," said Sarmad, "I vote someone is a traitor and that someone is." Here he paused for some seconds, "Zack."
"What!?" yelled Zack, as he rose, in anger, “How can you accuse me just like that? Have you forgotten all the pranks we played? Do you really think that I, of all people would betray you?” Sarmad replied by standing up as well. They both were ready for an all out brawl.
"Yes," he said "That is why you do not like this topic. Besides we all know how man is attracted to money just like a dog is attracted to meat."
"Sit Down!" thundered Boris.
"He’s completely right, you both are acting worse than children do when they fight," said Leo, disgusted.
"Sorry, it is just that I am so frustrated by the annoying couple of idiots who refuse to talk, then we are stuck in this darn time and as our Time Machine is not working because those same two idiots accidentally damaged it so we cannot go back to our own time," apologized Sarmad, but he still remained frustrated.
"But why accuse me, I am innocent," raged Zack, still angry at being accused
"Enough, I say,” said Boris, firmly.
"Shall we question Giro and Malince again? They might know something," suggested Leo, quietly.
“I guess so. Besides it’s not like we have any other leads to follow. This time get a gun as well. If I have to torture them, I will do it," replied Boris, although he himself was not sure if he would be able to bring himself to torture them.

“I don’t think so,” said another voice, dramatically.
“Why am I not surprised to see another batch of people who want to dispose of us?” said Boris, with a groan.
He and his companions turned around to see a group of eight people staring at them, menacingly each of them armed with revolvers. They all seemed to be very good athletes and powerful people. It seemed as if they were dogs on a leash, just waiting to be set free. It was as if the leash was held by the only man who wasn’t as powerful and strong as the others.
In fact he was somewhat short and had a small beard. While he looked as if he were the weakest, he also was the most menacing. There was nothing scary about his body except those atrous eyes of his. They betrayed anger, frustration and malice. They alone could scare away an armed bandit. No one noticed this yet, but all of his hatred and fury was focused on one man, alone and that man’s name was Boris.
The instant Boris glanced upon the man, he cowered back in fear and realization. He knew this man. He knew him very well. This man was the last person Boris wished to see in this timeline, especially as he was so angry at him.
“I bet you didn’t expect to see me, my dear Boris,” he said in a voice that clearly expressed malice and venom. Then he changed the tone of his voice and spoke with mock politeness. “What? Why are you not jumping in joy at seeing me? I’m hurt, Boris. Is that a way to greet someone of my esteem?”
Boris bared his teeth like a dog in indignation and exasperation but he managed to curb his wish to fling himself upon this crafty man. Boris knew that he was pushing his buttons to see how much he could annoy Boris before he snapped. The man snickered at Boris’s attempt to stay calm.
“How do you know this man, Boris?” asked Leo in an accusing tone. He was about to say more but a gunshot silenced him. One of the men had shot at the sky, merely to intimidate the foursome. They could always grab their own guns, but the problem was that the moment they would, they would probably be shot.
“Boris!” barked the leader. “Introduce me.”
“Very well,” said Boris, with a sigh. “Sit tight, this might take a while.” He paused and took a deep breath. “This man is none other than my brother, Mike.”
Everybody’s eyes bulged and they all gazed at Boris and then turned to look at Mike. They all could see a familial resemblance between the two but it was still hard to believe. Boris had occasionally mentioned the fact that he had a brother but he had never went into an explanation of him and they hadn’t bothered to ask.
“You’ve got to be kidding me?” Sarmad was astonished.
“The brother of my friend appears to be trying to kill me? What a joyful moment.” A sarcastic comment could be heard.
“Nice weather.” Leo didn’t bother to look surprised even though he indeed was.
“Shut your mouths and listen, or I might not give you a chance to ever hear again,” Mike gave a threat to his brother’s friends.
Boris ignored his friends’ exclamations and his brother’s threat; instead he chose to continue with what he was saying, “Well, I was working at TEAC as the main engineer and Mike was the astronaut. We had constructed a rocket for him to travel all the way to one of the many moons of Jupiter. But just before takeoff...” He trailed off expecting someone to say something and to increase the suspense, in a very theatrical manner. When no one replied he continued with regret. “I made a big mistake that caused the rocket to rise of the ground for a fairly large distance but then immediately crashing down. I doubt you’ll understand why it crashed back down, so I shan’t explain it.”
“Mike had suffered a head injury, a broken neck and tons of bruises and scratches. He in fact even got a scar which is hidden by his beard. He never forgave me, no matter how much I apologized to him. Mike was so angry and furious that he marched out of TEAC. I guess he has joined with our rival organization known as The 8th Solar. The 8th Solar is a company that has often been accused of smuggling and murdering, however it has never been proven so they still exist. They learned by a spy that I myself left TEAC because of reasons you will not understand. How the 8th Solar found out about the Time Machine is beyond me. How he came here I am not sure but I have a theory.”
Everyone listened in suspense not daring to breathe in case Boris suddenly decided to stop explaining some of his rather shady past. Zack in particular was thrilled. He adored tales and read them whenever he possibly could.
“I believe they copied our blueprints but without my ingenious mind with them, they created an error. They did not realize it and luckily for them it seems that they had survived. But their copy Time Machine probably broke down, which is why they wanted to use ours. That also explains why they asked for the Cyber-drive’s instruction manual which I myself created, so that they could escape.”
“But why take our Cyber-drive?”
“I doubt they took it,” answered Boris. Everyone’s eyes widened and their mouth’s opened and closed like a goldfish. “I think that it burnt itself out.
“Well done, Boris,” said Mike, feigning gratitude as he clapped, mockingly. “You are a gifted storyteller indeed, and you hit the nail.”
“So what are you going to do with us, Mike?” said Boris,
“Boris my brother,” Mike insultingly smiled, “I shall be blunt – I hate you with all my being. If you weren’t my brother, you would be minced meat by now. I came to this time just to finish and eradicate you. However, much to my regret, there is a part of my heart, deep inside, that still loves you.”
“You’re messing with me. This is all a sick game that you’re playing with me isn’t it? You want to torture me before I die, right? You want to give me a false sense of security, right?” Boris asked, unbelievingly.
“Not at all,” said Mike, surprisingly and seriously. “All that I’m saying is true. My heart refuses to kill you, and thus, I give you a chance to join the 8th Solar.”
“You are asking me to throw away all that I have been taught – All the morals and ethics that I have learnt in my life. I throw all of that away just to save my own skin!?” Boris was flabbergasted.
“Yes,” answered Mike.
“Mike, I refuse to sell my friends’ life away,” declared Boris, “As much as I’d like to be with you, I cannot betray my friends. Sarmad and Zack – Both of them are the most annoying people I know. But they have heart. They’d never betray me to save their own lives. They’d rather die than commit such an atrocity. Leo – He is a silent person who appears to be heartless. But he too has heart. He would also die than sell out the lives of those with whom he has a bond with.” Boris tried to refrain from using the word ‘friend’ with Leo, as he knew how upset he could get.
“So be it,” Mike was shocked beyond belief. Secretly he wished that he had such a bond with his only brother. “I would kill you right now and right here. But I have honor and self-respect and I refuse to kill an unarmed prisoner. Take out your weapons and fight us.”
The group of prisoners was astonished, but they weren’t complaining. They quickly took out their weapons and braced themselves. Mike suddenly raised his weapon and aimed at Leo, whose quick reflexes allowed him to move just before it hit him,
Leo too took out his revolver and shot a few men. They tried to shoot him but Leo kept on ducking behind a boulder after every other shot. All the other men gave a fighting call and also started fighting.
Bang-bang went the guns.
Many bangs were hear as someone often fell down with an injury but always rose back up. Sometimes they never got up at all, but that was a rare occurrence.
“Guy’s this isn’t working,” said Sarmad, as he and his team took a few seconds to catch their breath, behind a boulder.
“I agree,” answered Boris, breathing heavily.
“There’s too many of them, we need a plan,” Sarmad said.
“What can we do?” Zack asked. He peeped a glance from the boulder and tried to shoot one of the people and it struck cleanly on his foe’s right shoulder, who howled with pain and fury.
“If you can’t attack at their heart or forehead, then aim at their feet. Even if they have their hands to aim and shoot with, it’s better if we can remove their movement. It’ll be easier to aim then,” suggested Leo, smartly. “Most these guys aren’t the best of shooters, that’s for sure. We need to exploit that weakness and use it to our advantage.”
“Good suggestion,” commended Boris. He looked at the other two, “You heard the man. Now let’s give it our best.” Everybody nodded and waited for the right moment to shoot. Leo did a flip and reached another boulder gracefully.
“Spread out,” he shouted as everyone obliged instantly. Leo was an ace strategist and during a battle was always the leader.
The men were unaware of the fact that despite appearing that they were easily winning, the other team was having a hard time fending off their opponent’s attacks.
“They’re better than I thought, I’ll give them that,” One of them commented.
“Sir,” a man said to Mike, “we have lost three men.”
“Pray for their souls,” Mike said, sadly, as he gazed at his feet in dismay. Despite wanting to kill his brother and anyone else who stood in his way, he hated to lose men. They did not deserve to die such a horrible and gruesome death. “The worst thing is that none of them have fallen. They’re talented, as much as I hate to admit it.”
Mike paused. He would have to make a decision. His men – Or his brother’s head? He reluctantly made his decision.
“If we lose more than two more men, then we retreat!”
“Pardon, sir?” the man said, hoping that he wasn’t saying what he was.
“If we lose more men, then we retreat!” Mike confirmed.
“But sir-” the man began.
“I’ve made by decision,” said Mike, firmly.
“Yes sir.”
“Now let’s get a move on. Our allies need us.” With a fighting cry, he crept from the boulder in which they were hiding, and began to shoot at the enemies.
The battle raged on. Leo and Mike both were expert shots and took out the most. Suddenly one bullet struck Sarmad in the shoulder and he clutched it in pain. It had been shot by Mike. Sarmad ducked behind a boulder and rubbed the skin and learnt that it wasn’t too bad. He came out of hiding and shot at Mike’s heart, however it narrowly missed its target.
Another bullet struck Boris in his arm. Fortunately it was his right arm and he preferred to use his left arm anyway. This one too, had been shot by Mike who seemed to be making most of the shots.
One of the opponents kept on coming forward boulder by boulder. Soon he was too close for comfort.
“We have to get rid of that guy up front,” Boris shouted to his comrades.
“He’s too quick in moving. I can’t shoot him,” Sarmad called back.
Sarmad suddenly felt like he was being watched. He looked behind himself only to receive a crushing blow from someone.
The man who had been moving quickly was merely a decoy while someone else crept up the lines.
“Shoot Sarmad,” shouted someone from the opposing team. The man was about to shoot Sarmad, but to his shock, his gun had run out of bullets, and he was now with only his fists.
He could do only one thing – he landed punch after punch on Sarmad’s gut, who replied by giving a crushing kick, to his shin, before sweeping his off his feet. The man quickly got up, before Sarmad could capitalize and attempted to deliver a sloppy punch to his foe’s head, which the latter easily sidestepped.
To Sarmad’s shock, the blow was actually a feint, as the man had cleverly taken the former’s gun from his belt and gave a devastating blow, with the gun, by smashing it around his face. The victim of the blow had given up to unconsciousness, and was spared the pain of the brutal blows, that he was receiving. and was shot straight through the stomach, as the blood rushed out.
“Sarmad!” was a simultaneous cry from three people. Leo and Zack took out their guns and shot the two nearby enemies.
“Is he, well, you know?” asked Zack as they checked up on poor Sarmad.
“Of course he isn’t,” growled Leo, angrily. He was secretly unsure of his rival’s fate but he hoped that it would be pleasant. He checked his wrist for a pulse.
A slight and faint throbbing could be heard.
“He’s still alive,” Leo said, “I presume that the bullet just barely missed his vital organs, but he’s in need of immediate medical attention. He might not live long like this and possibly may die by his wounds.” Leo was determined to avoid that fate. He couldn’t imagine a life without Sarmad.
“How many of the opponents are left,” he barked at Boris.
“Mike and two others,” Boris replied, ignoring Leo’s harsh tone.
‘Come on Sarmad, hang in there,’ was the thought going through each of their minds as they rose up to finish off their foes. They all simultaneously came out of the boulder’s shield and shot at the remaining fighters who fired back.
The battle had resumed.
A few minutes earlier
“Sir, they appear to be treating Sarmad or maybe they’re checking if he’s still alive. This is an ideal opportunity to attack them. They are currently unsuspecting of an attack,” a man reported to Mike.
“We shall not attack them. I forbid you,” Mike said, sternly. “I guarantee they’re mourning over his dead body or they’re taking a few minutes break. Or they might be thinking of a plan. I refuse to attack them when they are unsuspecting. That is an act of someone without honor and I am not such a person. Besides we could also use a few minutes rest.”
“Whatever you say, sir,” said the man.
Back to Present Time
Leo was fighting ferociously. He allowed Sarmad to get hurt. He let himself be useless. He would not make the same mistake twice. Despite all of his previous denials, Leo had finally come to terms with what had finally happened.
He had become friends with Sarmad, Boris and Zack.
The thought disgusted him. It was utterly repulsive. How could he – Leo – finally make friends? And the fact that one of them was a person who was a complete clone of Jaguar, only further annoyed him.
But yet, it felt so right.
Leo had to admit, it did feel nice to know that he had a shoulder to lean on. That he wasn’t completely alone in this harsh, cruel world. That someone cared about him. He felt complete – something that he hadn’t felt in a long time. Leo also knew that he had been friends with Boris, Zack and especially Sarmad for a long time. Sarmad and Zack kept things lively even if they were often annoying and Boris was a generous soul considering that he had allowed the penniless Leo to live in his house and had asked for nothing in return.
Perhaps Leo had changed. But despite of all of this – despite of making friends, Leo refused to let anyone know of this change. He didn’t want anyone to think that he wasn’t heartless.
No, he wanted to be feared. To him a friend meant someone whom you could trust with your life – not someone who you wanted to listen to your feelings and such rubbish. Don’t get him wrong, Leo would always be there for his friends whenever they needed him but he didn’t want to listen to utter rubbish that people call feelings.
Leo had discovered a purpose in life and it was something he would never allow someone to take away from him. He would not let Sarmad die. That was why he was shooting without mercy. He didn’t have any time to spare. He went all out. He repeatedly shot at his targets and then ducked to reload, only to rise and repeat his actions almost instantly.
In the battle one bullet hit the lantern Mike himself had hung.
The cave was all of a sudden in darkness! For a moment no one said anything and hesitated to even breathe, then suddenly a struggling scuffle took place in the dark. No one dared to shoot in case they hit their own men. One or two guns however did go off, by some of the more foolish men, and a thud was heard.
Someone had died.
Everyone was quiet for one moment. Mike's men were attempting to make a headcount while the other men were also counting each other but there was so much shouting and screaming that nobody could make themselves heard. One of Mike's men flashed a torch open. There on the ground was Mike whose chest was bleeding profusely.
“B-B-Boris,” he said in a weak and whispery tone.
“What is it brother?” Boris was down on his knees and was trying to stop the blood from rushing out so fast and effectively slowing it down.
“What are you…?” Leo’s protest was interrupted by Zack hushing him.
“Boris, I’m-I’m sorry,” Mike whispered, surprising everybody.
“Conserve your energy, brother,” Boris advised. “Otherwise you’ll die.”
“That is in-inevitable,” Mike said, speaking through weak coughs. “Boris, I’m really and truly sorry, for all that I have done. I was blinded by my rage at you and I never thought about the good that you have done. Do you remember the time you defended me from Ron?” Mike grinned weakly as his mind traveled back in time.
*Flashback*
“Wow,” said Mike, “Boris, floating in zero gravity sure is fun.” He did a somersault in the air. Boris had recently made a gravity machine – It was a room that could change the gravity of the earth to as desired. When you doubled the gravity, your weight doubled and it was very hard to stay standing. The gravity tripled was the highest any human could survive, Boris had concluded. Any higher and they would be flattened not unlike a pancake. Right now both Boris and his brother Mike were enjoying the benefits of Zero gravity. In it you could float and do other similar things.
“Mike! Boris!” roared a voice from outside the chamber, as the door was harshly knocked on.
“What is it, Ron?!” Boris shouted back.
“Don’t you have any work to do instead of fooling around? I understand that Boris is done with his work, but Mike can march right out of that idiotic and useless chamber of yours and test a few ships for me,” Ron said.
“Sorry, Ron,” said Mike, apologetically, “I’ll be outside in a few minutes.”
“I want you outside, right now!” yelled Ron, angrily.
“Computer, return chamber to normal gravity,” ordered Boris. Both Boris and Mike braced themselves as their weight came rushing down at them and they fell down to the floor, unhurt.
“Look here, Ron,” said Boris, determined and frustrated, “Mike is doing work. He is testing my gravity chamber. If this thing works without a flaw it will make all of us rich. Think about the advantages you would have in the long run.”
Ron stopped to think. It was true. The gravity chamber could be a hit and if successful, he would be rich. But to do that, it would have to be truly flawless and if Mike was needed in this, then so be it.
“Fine but I better be rich.” If one looked closely, they would see dollar signs in Ron’s eyes.
“Sure, sure,” Boris and Mike decided to shrug of Ron’s threats.
“I wonder if we can survive double gravity,” Mike inquired, deviously.
“Let’s find out,” answered Boris, returning Mike’s smirk.
*End Flashback*
“It’s a miracle that you survived double gravity. Thankfully I managed to even walk in it,” Boris’s voice went from teasing to boastful.
“Good-good bye, old friend,” Mike said, ignoring Boris’s playful teasing, “May god give you the best of lives.” His breathing became heavier and then it suddenly stopped and his pupils went blank.
Stretching from his cheeks was a big, toothy grin and his facial expression was relaxed and calm. Boris stared at his late brother’s body.
“Goodbye, Mike,” he said to himself, “I forgive you. If all goes well, you’ll enjoy luxuries in heaven.”
“May he,” agreed Zack, while Leo gave a silent prayer.
Mike’s former soldiers got down to their knees and gave a prayer for their excellent leader. Their leader was not only a fantastic strategist but also a nice and generous person in general. Unlike most people of 8th Solar, he actually treated them with respect and also he believed that they should be treated as people, not expendable machines.
"First of all," said Zack taking command as Boris was silent. "Your leader is gone, and you are lousy fighters, and only two of you are left. I do not want to shed anymore blood." Zack then looked at the damage made. Six of Mike’s men were dead; each had been struck several times. The lucky survivors were also injured.
In addition they themselves were also not without wounds – Boris had multiple bruises from punches and kicks he had received. Sarmad of course had suffered the worst of fates, as he continued to stay in an unconscious state. The blood that was flowing out had slowed down thanks to a rag, Zack had covered the wound with, but it was still fairly dangerous not to treat him soon. Fortunately, Zack and Leo were relatively unharmed although they too had small wounds that were not too worrisome.
The men put their hands up without a word and Zack quickly tied them up, as grimly and tightly as he could, while Leo and Boris went to check on Sarmad.
"If you manage to get out, you shall have earned my respect, and I won’t have French fries for the rest of my days," Zack said, grinning. The prisoners began to regret the fact that they had surrendered without putting up much of a fight.
“You’re the genius, how do we heal Sarmad?” demanded Leo in a serious tone.
“I… don’t know,” forced out Boris. Leo pushed Boris and forcefully held him from his collar and lifted him. He stared at Boris’s eyes, with his own cold orbs.
“Listen, professor,” said he. “His fate will be the same as ours, got it!? If he doesn’t live, I might go insane. And no one knows what insane people might do.” His tone was now sarcastic. “They might just kill you, and everyone else here, as well.” Leo dropped Boris, who rubbed his neck in pain, noticing that Leo’s vice grip had left a mark.
“It’s true, isn’t it?” Boris said to Leo, who was walking away for solitary time. “You really have become friends with Sarmad. I don’t know about Zack and me, but you’ve definitely become friends with Sarmad.”
Leo paused in his tracks for a brief moment and smirked to himself, “Maybe I have, or maybe I haven’t. Believe what you wish to.”
“How do we heal him?” asked Zack, having tied up Mike’s men.
“We have to stop the bleeding and cover the wound. Zack replace the rag quickly. Leo, you search the forest for an Hour Berry. I’m pretty sure that it is in this time and nearby. I remember seeing some of them. They are green but have many stripes of red in them as well. They’re the size of a small apple. But be warned, do not at all costs, mistake the deadly Jackal Berry for the Hour Berry.”
“While the Hour Berry shall close up the wound, the Jackal Berry shall further widen it and make the bleeding much quicker. You can tell the berries from each other easily because of the terrible and disgusting smell the Jackal Berry produces instead of the lovely and refreshing scent the Hour Berry produces. Make it snappy. You have approximately sixty minutes to find the berry and then grind it into many tiny pieces. If not, Sarmad will undoubtedly die. What are you waiting for? Move it and find the berry, Leo.”
“Not to intrude, but what’ll you be doing?” said Zack.
“Making a grave for my brother,” answered Boris, solemnly. Zack nodded, regretting the fact that he had asked such a question and went to do his duty. Leo had left several moments earlier.
Leo quickly cut through many short vines with his twin Sabers and looked around, searching for the fabled Hour Berry. According to his watch it had been ten minutes since he had left so he still had fifty minutes. But while fifty minutes were enough to locate the berry, crushing them would take a bit longer. Thus Leo had no time to spare, and he had to hurry. He was still searching for the berries ten more minutes later, when he bumped into a man. The man fell down and groaned but Leo held his ground.
“Who on Earth are you?” demanded the man.
“Name’s Leo,” answered Leo, helping the man up.
“Leo. Hmm, that name sounds familiar,” pondered the man. He snapped his fingers in realization and horror. “You’re one of the Time Travelers, aren’t you?”
Leo frowned. How did this man know about the Time Machine? He couldn’t… unless. Leo instantly noticed the crest of 8th Solar etched on the man’s shirt.
“You’re a member of Mike’s group of accursed scum,” said Leo, resisting the urge of spitting on the ground. He gave a grin, while getting into a stance with his twin swords.
“Wait,” said the man, fearfully, knowing how talented Leo was with sword. “I’ll tell you something if you don’t kill me.”
Leo’s eyebrows furrowed, “And what might that be?”
“There are more men of 8th Solar here; many more. And one of them include someone from your past,” said the man.
“Who is it?” he said with a growl. Anyone from his past was no doubt trouble.
“His name is…” was all the man could say, before a sniping gun sounded and the man collapsed.
Leo instantly looked ahead and with his keen eyes, he spotted a silhouette a few kilometers away. He knew that it was futile to capture the man and so he held the dying man who continued to breathe heavily.
“He… is… unstoppable,” said the man, “Run… away… while… you… still… can. He… is… after... you… Leo.” The man’s breathing grew heavier. “His name is…” The man died before he could complete his statement, that meant so much to Leo.
Leo knew that the man was useless now and so he just left the man’s body where it was, to be eaten by animals. Who knows the number of hearts this man had broken. He did not deserve a grave.
Leo looked at his wristwatch to discover that thirty minutes had passed. “This isn’t good. I don’t have much longer.”
Leo continued to search for the fabled Hour Berry. He found multiple berries that looked like one, but they were undoubtedly the Jackal Berries because of the foul and repulsive stenches that were coming from them. Leo despaired and began to lose hope, something that had never happened to him before. Leo’s fear of losing Sarmad, added with the fact that he hadn’t slept in a while, and because he was very hungry proved to be too much for his body and mind as he fell down and lost consciousness.
*Leo’s dream*
“Where am I?” Leo asked, looking around. He was in an empty dimension and the whiteness spread out for miles and miles until he couldn’t see anything. Nothing could be heard or seen except for the everlasting emptiness of the place. Leo was lying down on the white floor and to his utter surprise; he struggled to even get up. Leo looked at his hands and feet only to realize that they were small – So small that they could be mistaken for a child’s.
That thought was very ironic as Leo looked at his body to see that he was in a child’s body. More specifically in the body of who he once was – A pure, innocent and smiling boy whose eyes were cerulean and naïve like a boy’s should be. His features were no longer as matured as they once were, although they were fairly developed.
“Where am I?” repeated Leo – even his voice was more childlike.
“In the Dimension of Peace,” answered a voice.
“Who is this!?” Leo raised his voice.
“The one you love the most.” A figure formed in front of Leo. As the figure’s body was completed, Leo’s eyes widened, clearly showing his surprise.
Could it be!?
Yes. Those pure, cerulean blue eyes and the short white beard combined with the similar snow white hair could belong to only one person and one person only.
His father!
“Father!” shrieked Leo, running towards his father whom he had thought to be dead. The one man he trusted throughout his life – even after the whole Jaguar incident – the man who had ruthlessly and coldly been murdered by a monster known as Hades, who had since died. Tears ran down his face, something that was very rare. “I missed you so much!”
His father was just as Leo remembered albeit slightly younger – Cerulean blue eyes, a white beard and snow white hair. In addition he was wearing plain white clothes that together gave him an appearance of a ghost.
“Leo,” his father acknowledged returning the hug, his son was so eagerly giving. “Why have you given up on your search for the Hour Berry? And why have you given up on your friend Sarmad? Answer me.” His tone was just as Leo remembered – gentle but firm.
“Because I can’t find the berry, father,” answered the boy.
“Son, you must never give up. I’ve always told you that. How come you’ve lost sight of that?”
“I’m sorry, father. I’m a monster. I killed Hades. Even if he murdered you, it was wrong of me to do so. You always told me that you should never kill unless absolutely necessary.”
“That part is okay, son. Hades was a man who never would have changed no matter how many times you showed him mercy. Had he lived, he would have destroyed more lives just as he did to you. Anyway I’m ranting.” The man gave his signature laugh and scratched his head, sheepishly. “Leo, go back to the world. Help the man whom you cherish, and don’t let him die. And one more thing Leo – Beware of all things bad, an enemy from your past shall soon reveal himself and shall tempt you with the power of evil but do not be tempted lest you become the one thing you hate; lest you become just like Hades.”
“I won’t lose sight of what’s right, father,” said Leo, determinedly.
“One more thing,” said Leo’s father, “You will find the Hour Berry around a quarter of a kilometer North-West of where you are right now. Goodbye my son. Like I said before I died, I am proud of you and the strong man that you’ve become. You’ve surpassed all my expectations,” Leo’s father smiled, before fading away into the whiteness as only specks of light now remained.
*End Leo’s dream*
Leo’s eyes flashed open and he quickly got up.
“I will not allow my heart to be tainted by the evil, and the whispers, and I will not lose hope. I will find the Hour Berry and I will save my friend’s life.” Leo was reborn. He would still be cold and unfriendly. But he would always be there for his friends, because he knew they would always be there for him. “Forgive me for giving up, Sarmad.” With a determined look, Leo followed the directions he was given.
One thing that confused Leo was what his father had said.
“An enemy from your past shall soon reveal himself and shall tempt you with the power of evil but do not be tempted lest you become the one thing you hate; lest you become just like Hades.”
Who could that person be. He had learnt that Jupiter was still in prison, and Hades, of course was already dead. He wasn’t sure of the whereabouts of Jaguar, but he doubted that he was evil. Of course there was the man who had given him a mackintosh, before betraying him, in the trial, but he didn’t seem to malevolent. Neither did Judge Stamp seem a necessarily bad person. It couldn’t be Mort, could it? The man who Leo had put in his place when he first went to prison. Perhaps it was some crazy Hades fanatical fan, but he doubted that, as well. After all, his father had specifically said that the person would be from his past.
Leo shook his head and cleared his mind. First he needed to search for the Hour Berry. Within minutes of running, the man had found what he was looking for – the Hour Berry. The man was inwardly happy, but he knew that he didn’t have time for any games and after looking at his watch, Leo realized that he only had ten minutes to reach where he was and grind the berry.
“Damn!” he said to himself before running with speed that he hadn’t thought possible. Fear had granted him wings so that he may reach his friends. Leo remembered reading once that when desperate; a man’s sub-consciousness gives him more speed or physical strength although his other senses are weakened. Leo could see his friends very clearly now.
Boris was giving a prayer for Mike as he was standing above his grave that he had dug. Zack seemed to be thinking for some way to further help slow down Sarmad’s blood that was slowly but surely oozing out. A few more seconds was all it took for Leo to reach his comrades. Boris almost instantly noticed him but didn’t bother to acknowledge him.
“Do you have it?” he asked, urgently. Leo gave a simple nod, and Boris sighed in relief.
“How much time do we have?” said Leo.
“Judging by his condition, I’d say he has no more than a few minutes.”
“Grind the berry! I’ll go and check up on Sarmad.”
“I’m afraid it’ll take at least three minutes before I can get the medicine,” said Boris, in a somber tone.
“Then get to work, professor,” Leo was trying his best to stay calm, and it seemed to be somewhat working, as he was feeling fairly tranquil. Boris obliged and quickly took the berries and began to carefully crush them, while Leo ran to his dying friend and repeatedly told him to hang on.
“Zack get some heather and soft grass,” said the blue-eyed Leo.
“How in the world is that going to help our predicament?” Zack was confused.
“We need to help him relax and conserve his energy.”
“Understood,” Zack gave a salute. Meanwhile, Sarmad began to trash and violently move and struggle while he constantly murmured inaudible words that not even the keenest of ears would be able to pick up. Both Zack and Leo stared at their struggling friend and wondered what they could do.
“Zack!” reminded Leo, to his cohort who immediately went to find heather and soft grass for Sarmad to lie down on.
Whatever Sarmad was going through, Leo hoped he could live through until Boris finished with the medicine. There was only a minute left for him to finish grinding it and an unknown amount of time Sarmad would breathe – It could be a few more seconds or a few more hours for all they knew.
*Sarmad’s Nightmare*
“We know your pain,” a twisted voice sounded. “Join us. Forgot those stupid things you call morals and become one with us. Destroy those insolent people whom you call friends.”
“Who in the heck are you!?” screamed Sarmad.
For who knew how long, this voice was torturing him by tempting him to join them and become an evil maniac. The voice was plain twisted and filled with malice. It was a low, gruff and gravelly voice and although he didn’t know why, it reminded Sarmad of a character from a monster movie he had seen.
“I am you,” the malevolent voice cackled.
“As if – I could never be a monster like you who is trying to make me forget everything I’ve learnt in my life,” said Sarmad with a snort. “What are you really?
“I am called many things. I am your hatred, I am your jealousy, I am your anger, I am your fear, and I am your craftiness that rises whenever you prank Boris. I am your mischief, I am your greed and I am your evilness. I am your Evil Side. You can never get rid of me. Let go of these pathetic morals such as kindness, such as honesty and such as your generosity. Join us and we shall give you a power far beyond what you imagine. I shall grant you abilities that are thought to never have existed such as how to fly and how to destroy an entire planet.”
Sarmad could do nothing as a figure formed in front of him and once the figure was complete, Sarmad was beyond shocked for there; right in front of him was a complete clone of himself. The new figure looked just like Sarmad, albeit a few exceptions – Unlike Sarmad, who usually smiles and stay jolly, this person’s forehead was furrowed into a frown and his face was stern, grim and downright abhorrent. Another difference was his eyes; they were wicked, sinister and looked down at Sarmad as if he were a slave.
“I have no hatred. And I have no jealousy. I have no anger. I have no fear and I don’t have any craftiness even when I prank. I prank as a joke, never as a way to get back at somebody. I have no mischief and I have no greed. I-I have no e-evilness,” declared Sarmad, correctly guessing that this figure was his evil side. Sarmad’s Evil Side noticed how Sarmad had stammered in the end and he knew that eventually he would join him. Just a little more effort was all that was needed.
“Then pray, tell me,” said the figure, “Did you not feel hatred when Leo apparently betrayed you for Giro and Malince?”
“That was a misunderstanding.”
“That’s not the point. You felt hate for Leo, when you thought that he had betrayed you. That proves that you carry hatred within you and that it does rise when needed.”
“That’s not true!”
“Isn’t it?”
“It’s not!”
“Look at me. Do you see a hint that I am giving you a fib?”
Sarmad reluctantly peered into his evil side’s face and searched it for a hint of a lie.
“Darned fool,” Sarmad’s Evil Side gave him a quick jab into the face and then gave a powerful roundhouse kick in the same spot.
“Tell me Sarmad, do you know this move?” The evilness in Sarmad gave a swift hook to his counterpart and then slammed his knee against his stomach causing him to cough up blood and saliva. Indeed Sarmad did know that technique; it had been used by Leo against him a few days before they came here during a friendly spar. His evil side grabbed Sarmad by the head and shouted to him while constantly and furiously assaulting him.
“Tell me, do you not feel jealousy when you see ten year olds playing with their parents while your own parents died before you could enjoy your childhood!”
“Shut up!” shouted Sarmad through the attacks he was getting from his evil counterpart. His Evil Side showed a trace of humanity when he let go of him, having decided that he had had enough. “Why do you want me to convert to evil so badly?”
“Because I’ve been trapped here, while you’re good side has taken over this body. You don’t know how it feels to be eternally trapped here while you enjoy life and its pleasures. But when you were near death caused by that amateur shooting of that man, I took advantage of the choice. You were finally inside your sub-conscious so that meant that I could pay you a visit which I have. Now I will have the front side of your body while you can stay here and rot just as I have for so many years. So now you must coalesce with me.”
“I pity you and I understand your problems, but I cannot let you take over this body, God knows the damage you’ll cause.”
“You are so pathetic Sarmad. Was it not your fear of losing your life that overtook you when you saw your best friend being robbed while you just stood there and did nothing but watch?”
“I was but a child. What could I have done?” asked Sarmad.
“What could you have done? Go ask Leo that,” said Sarmad’s Evil Side, knowingly.
“What’s that supposed to mean?” demanded Sarmad.
“Ah, so Leo hasn’t told you anything. Could it be that he doesn’t trust you? Could it be that he thinks of you as nothing but a tool to get whatever he wishes?”
“Y-You’re lying,” yelled Sarmad.
“Are you trying to convince me or yourself?” The man’s Evil Side grinned inwardly even though it wasn’t a nice grin – In fact, it was rather demonic. He was clearly pushing Sarmad’s buttons, trying to manipulate him.
Sarmad chose to stay silent this time.
“I don’t feel that I need to convince you further.” The Evil Side cackled with glee. “Give yourself to me.”
“I-I p-p-pledge m-m-m-myself t-to t-the teachings o-of e-evil,” said Sarmad with hesitance but he knew it to be the only way to free himself from the torture this creature was giving him.
“To complete the ceremony, I need you to say all of the useless morals that you’ve been thought and then spit on the ground,” said the Evil Side in a commanding voice.
Sarmad was about to complete the ceremony when another voice sounded. But unlike the first one, this voice flowed gently like a river and was sweet, soothing, comforting and relaxing. It was so warm that it could make even Leo burst into tears. The melodious voice was as refreshing as the pleasant winter breeze and it was fruity and silvery.
“Don’t give in.”
“Darn, why did you have to show up,” the Evil Side growled.
“Who’re you?” said Sarmad.
“Sarmad, you have an Evil Side, right?” asked the new voice.
“To my utter regret,” answered Sarmad.
“Sarmad, you are not your Good Side,” said the voice surprisingly, “Because I am.” No sooner had these words been uttered, another figure was formed but it too had a couple of key differences than the original Sarmad – Unlike the latter, the former’s face was more matured but it was just as gentle if not gentler than its original. But more important and noticeable were his eyes – They were the same teal color but unlike the competitive spark that was in the original’s eyes, his were calm, cool and collected but without the want for a challenge. Rather it seemed as if all it wanted was peace and prosperity.
“So, what am I?” said Sarmad, wondering if he weren’t what he thought himself to be.
“You are the bridge between good and evil. Your good shines through by your smiles, your honesty and your friendliness. And some of your evil side also shows through. It is your evil side that influences you to plan and do pranks and it also influences you whenever you participate. Without your evil side, your power would be reduced to that of a child. Without me, you would wreck havoc around the world like a criminal until you would be caught. He is lying about the fact that you can learn how to fly and blow up an entire planet. You need us both.”
“No, he’s lying!” protested the Evil Side.
“Why would I lie to you if I represent all of which is good in you?” said the Good Side, to the original Sarmad.
The Evil Side paled knowing that his counterpart had made a good point. His mind raced, thinking of another excuse.
Meanwhile the Good Side continued, “You need us both, so you cannot destroy your Evil Side, but you cannot join him either.”
“Why does Evil Side want control over my body?” said Sarmad.
“Greed,” was the prompt answer.
“Then what can I do, if I can’t destroy it or join it?” asked Sarmad.
“I … don’t know,” confessed the Good Side.
“There must be some way,” said Sarmad, almost begging.
“Grant me a moment,” said the Good Side, beginning to ponder over what to do.
A few minutes passed and no ideas made their way to the Good Side or the original Sarmad. However evil never prevails as the Good Side suddenly felt a light bulb lit over his head and he got an idea on how to help his original. Why hadn’t he thought of it sooner?
“There is a way,” he finally said. Sarmad felt like cheering, “But it is not very pleasant and you may never ever return from what shall happen.” Sarmad lost his cheerfulness but it was replaced with sheer determination, no doubt influenced by his evil side who was still thinking of a way to make Sarmad give his body to him and him alone.
“Have you ever wondered where we get our powers from?” asked the Good Side. He didn’t give his original a chance to reply and continued, “We get our powers from two chunks of Crystal. My crystal is called the Snow White Crystal and its qualities are true to its name – It is whiter than the purest snowflake. If that diamond were to be destroyed, I would remain alive but I would be sent into the deepest and darkest corner of your sub-consciousness from where I would never be able to rise to take control of your body, but I would still influence you when needed. The same goes for the Snow White Crystal’s counterpart, the Black Night Crystal. If destroyed it would permanently send your Evil Side into the corner of your sub-consciousness but it would still influence you when needed, such as whenever you walk into a fight so…” He trailed off.
“I just have to destroy the Black Night Crystal,” finished the Original Sarmad with glee. His good side gave a nod.
“Indeed.”
“Alright then, whatever am I waiting for,” With that Sarmad was off to search for the crystal while his Good Side waited for him to return which he did about ten seconds later.
“Uh, wherever is the Black Night Crystal?” he said sheepishly, scratching his head.
“Inside your mind,” said Sarmad’s Good Side in a mysterious way.
“Do you mind explaining that in simple English?”
“Just imagine that you are next to the Black Night Crystal and your sub-consciousness will automatically send you there via your mind trail.”
“Right, imagine,” said Sarmad determinedly, ignoring the part about the mind trail. He had had enough scientific mumbo-jumbo to last him a lifetime. He closed his eyes and focused while his Good Side sighed and waited for him to ask for what he forgot to.
He was right as Sarmad suddenly opened his eyes and sheepishly asked, “What does the Black Night Crystal look like anyway?”
“Just like its name, it’s a jet black, large chunk of crystal. That’s all there is to it.”
“Right,” said Sarmad and once again began to focus as he shut his eyes and pictures a jet black chunk of crystal. Eventually he managed to picture a dark colored crystal and within instants he vanished – teleported to his destination. His Good Side could only hope that he would be able to summon up the strength to destroy the Black Night Crystal.
“Darn you,” came the dark voice of Sarmad’s Evil Side. “I must make sure that he doesn’t reach the Crystal.” He muttered some curses under his breath.
“I don’t think so,” said the Good Side.
The Evil Side looked at him and gave a terrible cackle, “Pooh, whatever in the world are you going to do about it? You don’t have a malicious bone in your body remember. You are pure of heart and you cannot fight because your heart will ache and you will carry the guilt for the rest of your days.”
“True,” admitted Sarmad’s Good Side, “and I have no interest in stopping you. I just wanted you to know that even though time flows slower here than the real world, it will not take more than a few hours over here for him to be healed and leave the sub-conscious realm. And even if he doesn’t get healed, he will still destroy the Black Night Crystal.”
The Evil Side frowned and gave a growl, “Why are you doing this? You know as well as I do that if any one of the Crystals is destroyed, we both will cease to exist. Then Sarmad will have to make his own decisions, he can either join me or you. Do you want to take such a gamble and risk the safety of Leo, Zack and Boris?”
“I feel that it is a safe gamble,” said Sarmad’s Good Side.
“I never thought that you would be capable of lying. You lied to Sarmad. You told him that we would be sent into a prison while in reality we both would cease to exist even though some of our qualities will remain, such as my powerful strength.” The Evil Side said the last part with a lot of pride and arrogance.
The Good Side turned around and gazed at the far off distance, “Sometimes, you must lie for the greater good.”
“Darn you,” The Evil Side began to focus and pictured the Black Night Crystal and was instantly teleported to his destination.
“Where on Earth did you come from?” said Sarmad, shocked. He had been trying to destroy the Crystal but whoever made that thing made it too hard for him to crack within such a small amount of time.
“That doesn’t matter,” The Evil Side gave a growl. He would play no mind games this time. He would instantly do his job. “I will not let you destroy either of the Crystals.” Sarmad wondered why he had defended the Snow White Crystal as well but he quickly forgot his thought. There were much more important things to worry about.
The Evil Side didn’t give him a moment to say a word as he swiftly dashed forward with his hands raised high in an offensive and flawless stance. It was a modified version of the famous fighter Dijet who was an offensive fighter. Since Sarmad had watched many of his fights, it was natural that his Evil Side would know it. Sarmad got into a defensive stance in fairly decent speed that could be considered supernatural.
“I feel your hate, Original,” taunted the Evil Side. He decided that he would call his original that what he was. “You have aggression against me. You just want to kill me. Your anger is making you powerful. Give in to it. Give in to me. It is the only way for you to live. There, that strike you just did. I could feel all that hate, anger, fear and aggression.”
“Shut up!” Sarmad was losing himself to his anger.
“Ah good shot,” continued the Evil Side, “No doubt it was so powerful because of your hatred. Use your hatred to strike me down and then you will become what you swore to destroy.”
“Leave me alone!” More anger was being released as the Evil Side craftily pushed his original’s buttons.
“Well done, Original,” said the Evil Side in mock congratulation, “You’re conversion is almost complete and soon you will become what I am.”
“Shut up!”
The Evil Side knew that despite pushing his buttons, his Original wouldn’t crack anytime soon. So he began to use a different way, “Once I’m done with you, your anger and aggression will be so much that you will immediately murder Boris, Zack and even your friend Leo.”
Instead of falling to the bait, Sarmad clung on to the shred of humanity he had left, “More of a reason to resist your alluring and tempting offer.”
The Evil Side was bewildered, astonished and even flabbergasted but he slyly didn’t show it, “So you admit that it is tempting?”
“No I don’t,” insisted Sarmad.
“Your conversion is inevitable, Original. Just gave in. Struggling against destiny is futile and will never work.” The Evil Side continued to try and convince Sarmad.
“Destiny is never set in stone.”
“Famous last words,” was the smart reply.
“Darn you, brute” said Sarmad, using his quick reflexes to block or dodge the many attacks his opponent was giving. Having had enough, Sarmad went on to the offensive and started delivering many sharp jabs and punches and kicks.
Instead of connecting, all of the blows missed as the Evil Side dodged them as if he were dancing. He had yet to come close to breaking a sweat.
“Don’t you get it, Original?”
“What in God’s name are you talking about,” Sarmad swore.
“Temper, temper,” the Evil Side wagged his finger as if he were a mother.
“Funny, coming from you,” shot back Sarmad.
“What was that!?” barked the Evil Side angrily.
“See what I mean. Now what the heck were you talking about?”
“Well since you’re literally dying to know, I’ll tell you, but then I shall kill you without a second though.”
“Fair enough,” said Sarmad.
“I am your Evil Side.”
“Surprise, surprise,” said Sarmad cynically.
“Don’t you get it, Original? That means that I have all of your strength but I have no room for compassion. Thus that makes me the ultimate killing machine. You on the other hand, have traits from both of your sides – Good and Evil. However you don’t have the full extent of the traits you’ve inherited from us. You have evil in you, however it is usually suppressed and is much, much less than my own. Even if you give in to the darkness, your power will never be as strong as my own because no matter what, you will always have a small ounce of good in you. The same thing goes for your Good Side as well. You will never be as gentle as your other side, because you will always have my fiery determination and my occasional cowardice, which is the one trait of my own that I hate. So no matter what you will never be as strong as me, just as you cannot be as gentle as your good side.”
“True,” said Sarmad, with a grin, “But I inherited my brains from my Good Side and they are something you don’t have as much as I have. So I can always trick you. Hey look, the Black Night Crystal is cracking.”
“What did you say?!” Sarmad’s Evil Side turned around in shock. He realized that he had been tricked and turned around again to block the inevitable blow.
Too late!
Sarmad was on him and gave violent and merciless jabs.
“Y-Yes!” laughed the Evil Side through the blows he was receiving. “I feel your anger; your hatred. Kill me now.”
Realizing what he was doing, Sarmad let go of his enemy and stood up and clutched his head in anger.
“What have I become?!”
His opponent was bleeding profusely but none of his bones were broken. Instead of being upset and angry at being beaten so badly, the Evil Side laughed and chuckled and cackled. He knew he had beaten his Original mentally.
“Give in to your hate,” said the Evil Side with a snicker. “Oh wait, you already have.” He broke into another fit of giggles. He was unaware of what he had just done.
He had triggered a memory of Sarmad’s past.
*Flashback*
“You lost fair and square, Leo,” said Sarmad.
“Sure,” said Leo shortly and sarcastically although he had an amused smile on his face.
“Leo,” said Sarmad in a serious tone, “How do you live with it?”
“Live with what?” Leo was genuinely curious. Few things could make Sarmad lose his smile and put on a serious expression.
“With your hate,” answered Sarmad. “I mean, I know how much hatred and anger you hold. How do you remain sane?”
“Never thought you’d ask such a philosophical question like this,” said Leo with a snigger. “I simply don’t let it take control of me. Hatred is not something to be afraid of because to live you simply mustn’t let it take control of you.”
“Hmm, thanks Leo. It was just a curious question, okay. Don’t take it personally.”
“Sure.”
Sarmad walked out of the room leaving Leo to his thoughts.
“And I have a motive to live for,” Leo added, looking at the leaving Sarmad.
*End Flashback*
“Leo’s right,” said Sarmad.
“W-What?!” demanded the Evil Side.
“Sometimes, you just have to let go of your restraints,” said Sarmad. “And let your anger take control because I am the bridge, and I will not be hurt if I give in to my anger. My Good Side would be hurt if it became Evil but not I. I can harness my anger and I can use it as a tool. Because to be blunt: I hate you.” Sarmad gave a scream of anger and fury and raced forward with swiftness and gave an incredibly formidable attack to his opponent.
Even the Evil Side was taken-aback – It seems that his opponent had a lot more hatred than he had thought. But he quickly regained his composure and gave a cocky smirk.
“So, you’ve finally accepted your hatred. Now give in to me. Resisting is futile. Now that you’ve given your essence to anger, you will naturally be consumed by it.”
“That’s what you think.” Sarmad’s features relaxed and his face stretched into that goofy smile of his. “I now have both hatred, and gentleness inside me. Now I don’t want to beat you to the ground, so…” Sarmad trailed off.
“What are you saying?” asked the Evil Side.
“I’ll just destroy the Black Night Crystal.”
Instead of being on his knees and begging for mercy as Sarmad planned, the Evil Side gave a cackle full of spite and nastiness.
“You wouldn’t!”
“And just why not?” said Sarmad.
“My counterpart lied to you for the ‘Greater Good.’ This whole prison at the corner of the sub-consciousness – It’s all a lie. In actuality the both of us will cease to exist and you will be left to your own decisions because we’d not be able to influence you. You might go on a killing streak.”
“You lie,” said Sarmad in an accusing tone.
“Do I? Look into my eyes and look for any trace for a fib.”
“Very well,” Sarmad peered in to look at his eyes, only to be greeted by a punch.
“You fell for the same trick twice. Fool,” said the Evil Side with a twisted laugh.
“You’re low,” said Sarmad rubbing his cheek. “You just sealed your fate, Jinn.”
“Jinn?!” exclaimed the Evil Side acting as if he were flabbergasted. His voice took on a snickering tone, “You flatter me.”
“Enough!” roared Sarmad, “It is true – I cannot destroy the Black Night Crystal, now that I know the truth. But I can make you wish that you could die.” He raced forward and exchanged many strong blows. He shot a punch which was caught by his Evil Side. He shot another one with his other hand which was also caught.
“Surely, you don’t mean torture?” said the Evil Side, in a mocking voice.
“You’re darn right, I do.” Sarmad gave a harsh kick to his foe’s shin. His opponent let go of the former’s hands in pain as Sarmad took the opportunity to deliver a roundhouse kick that would make even an ox beg for mercy.
But the Evil Side stood his ground and countered with a roundhouse kick of his own which connected and Sarmad fell down, writhing in agony.
“Well it’s nice to see that you’ve grown a backbone, Original. But I’ve always had a backbone so I have more experience in using my anger to my advantage.”
“You’re right,” said Sarmad, getting up and rubbing a trickle of blood, coming from his lips, away. “But unlike you, I have support. Boris, Zack and even Leo are waiting for me. And they are the reason that I get up in the morning knowing that I have a life.”
“You sure are noble, Original,” said the Evil Side with a snigger. “This is rich.”
“And because of that,” said Sarmad, ignoring his Evil Side, “I’ll never give up.” Sarmad raced forward and swiftly gave a punch to his opponent, who dodged and swept Sarmad off his feet.
The Evil Side shamelessly slapped Sarmad across the face, before he could get up, and held him tightly by the hair, all the while giving incredible blows. He was about to deliver a ferocious boot to his head, when Sarmad quickly dodged and sidestepped him.
Sarmad then uncharacteristically used a low tactic by digging two of his fingers into each of his opponent’s eyes. This low move was probably used because of the fact that Sarmad was now being influenced by both his Good and Evil Side. The Evil Side quickly recovered before Sarmad could capitalize on the move.
“I see that you’re still holding back a bit,” said he, surprising Sarmad who was, in fact, holding back. “You’re afraid to let go of your restraints because you know that the hatred might overtake you.” He pretended to give a punch to his opponent’s stomach and Sarmad quickly tried to defend. The Evil Side, expecting this, instead went for the neck and he seized it. He tightened his grip as Sarmad began to choke in agony. He held the grip for a minute before letting him go as he knew that if Sarmad were to die, he too would cease to exist.
Wait!” said Sarmad in a weak tone as the Evil Side walked towards his original.
“What is it now?” groaned the Evil Side. He was being way too generous, lately.
“I have one last question,” said Sarmad.
“Well, if it is your dying wish, then so be it,” said the Evil Side, being oddly generous. “But make it quick. My patience runs thin very fast.”
“How am I your original? I mean weren’t you made before me?”
“Unfortunately we weren’t. You see, when you were born, you were, well, empty. It was after you grew up; say seven years old, when we began to take formation. You were influenced by the evil around you which caused me to be made. And all the nice people also influenced you and thus your Good Side was born. Because you had more good than evil, the Good Side took control of you, even though I influenced you on the odd days.”
“I see,” said Sarmad. “Your over-confidence and cockiness shall be your undoing, Jinn.”
“Darn it,” cursed the Evil Side. “Look as much as I’d like to be Jinn, sadly I’m not. My dream has been to become one, but alas, I am not. So cut it out.”
“Whatever,” Sarmad rose up, “I wasn’t asking that question out of sheer curiosity. No, I was asking that so I would have enough time to heal. The neck’s still a bit sore, but it’ll do.”
“Clever, I’ll give you that much,” said the Evil Side, not showing any emotion.
“Like I said, your cockiness and over-confidence shall be your undoing.”
“That’s what you think,” said the Evil Side, his voice still emotionless.
“Send me a postcard from hell!” shouted Sarmad as he ran forward with incredible swiftness and delivered a crushing punch at his opponent’s cheek and his foe quickly defended and returned the punch with one of his own.
“Your anger is so much that if you use it to its full extent, you will undoubtedly beat me to the ground,” said the Evil Side, his previously emotionless face was now mocking.
“I’d rather suffer defeat than lose to you,” Sarmad barked back.
“You truly are noble. You’d make a fine role model for children,” said the Evil Side, blocking a blow from Sarmad and returning one of his own. Sarmad ducked and then gave rapid punches to his Evil Side’s stomach. The Evil in Sarmad doubled over in pain and clutched his stomach in agony. Sarmad then finished the technique with a roundhouse kick to the chin of his enemy.
His Evil Side collapsed and groaned in the constant pain. He constantly rolled over and his original reached out to finish him.
“I’ll put you out of your misery permanently,” he said in a grim tone.
“Wait!” said the Evil Side in a soft, whispery and pained voice.
“If you plan on begging for mercy, then forget about it,” shouted Sarmad.
“You fool!” laughed the Evil Side, “That is not what I wanted to ask for. I am asking you to wait because I have more power left. The problem is that it is so strong that not even I can control it. Thus I need some time which I’m sure that you’ll provide me.”
“What makes you say that?” asked Sarmad although he had a vague answer to that question.
“Because the evil in you desires a challenge; it is blood thirsty and needs a good fight to satisfy it. Do you not want a good fight, Sarmad? I know you do so don’t even try to deny it. Go on, accept it and allow me to power up.”
“It is true that I wish for a challenge,” confessed Sarmad, “But I have a greater sense of justice than a wish for a thriller of a fight.” Sarmad’s voice was now determined, focused and confident. “And besides, how do you hope to get more power?”
“The power bit is none of your concern. But you know that you want to have a good fight, is that not true?”
“Yes I do,” said Sarmad, “But as I said, I will not give you a chance to power up.”
“Scared?” said the Evil Side in his scornful manner
That did it.
Sarmad twitched. Nobody insulted his pride and lived to tell about it and he would not allow that fact to change.
The Evil Side grinned in a disdainful manner. He knew that he had hit a nerve and that this might be his only chance to defeat Sarmad.
“Let’s do it!” challenged Sarmad. “Get your power. I’m waiting right here.”
“As you wish,” said the Evil Side with a smirk. He began to start some sort of weird spell or an odd ritual. “I call the power of the Black!” He raised an arm. “I call the power of the Night!” He raised his other arm. “I call the power of the Black Night.” He joined his arms together in an abnormal manner as Sarmad looked on with interest at the ritual. “Give me your power.”
The nearby Black Night Crystal started shimmering and shining and some sort of light formation was heading towards the Evil Side’s direction. As it reached him, he absorbed it which caused him to glow along with the Black Night Crystal which for some reason seemed to be growing slightly smaller.
A few minutes passed and the same thing repeated. The light formation reached the Evil Side who absorbed it and the Black Night Crystal seemed to grow smaller while Sarmad’s interest and curiosity grew larger.
At last the process was complete.
The Black Night Crystal had shrunk until it was the size of a small mug but upon looking at the Evil Side, he was shocked to see that nothing had happened to him.
“What?” said Sarmad in a comical manner, “In all of the Science Fiction movies I’ve watched the guy should have buffed up or have electricity crackling around him but you haven’t changed one bit.”
“Fool!” said the Evil Side, even his voice was the same, “This is reality.” He swiftly raced forward and slammed his knuckles against his original’s cheeks who was pushed back by the strength of the punch, by at least ten meters.
“Darn,” commented Sarmad to nobody in particular. “That hurt more than it should have. In fact, I feel like I’ve been hit by a bus.”
“Fantastic,” said the Evil Side sardonically, delivering a vigorous kick to his adversary. “Do you like this?”
“Sadistic freak,” cursed Sarmad.
“Once again, you flatter me,” said the Evil Side cynically. “Do call me Jinn again. For now I truly *am a monster.”
“Shut up!” Sarmad blocked a punch and delivered one of his own which was also blocked by the Evil Side who returned the blow with more force than imaginable. Sarmad fell on his knees and clutched his stomach in pain while coughing up blood and saliva. “How could that hurt so much?”
The Evil Side chose not to reply but instead just smirked at his opponent’s broken and battered condition. He continued to smile and soon burst into terrible laughter.
“I think that it’s time I finished you,” the Evil Side ceased his laughter.
“One last request,” begged Sarmad from the ground.
The Evil Side frowned. The last two times he had done this, he had regretted it later. But perhaps it would be alright. He was already invincible.
“Sure!”
His arrogance had blinded and brought him to believe that he was unstoppable and indestructible and that nobody could beat him.
“What does the Snow White Crystal look like?”
“If I were you I’d use my dying wish more efficiently but very well. The Snow White Crystal looks just like the Black Night Crystal except that it is obviously white instead of black and will be larger because I have sucked too much energy. There, happy? Now allow me to take control of your body otherwise I will torture you forever.”
He raised his arm in the air and was about to pretend that he was going to impale his original with it when the latter vanished without a trace.
“What in the?” the Evil Side groaned in realization. “Oh god no! The Mind Trail! He’s using it to teleport himself there so that he can absorb some of it but enough to keep the Good Side alive. And the worst part is that I cannot go near the Snow White Crystal because it is too pure for me whereas the Original can travel anywhere because he is the bridge. Darn it! Darn it!” He constantly repeated the words all the while punching and punishing the innocent air.
The Evil Side continued to punch the air when he came to another realization.
He wouldn’t mind having a good fight with Sarmad.
No, rather he’d enjoy it. Sarmad would probably not be that much stronger than he, so technique and skill would play a major part in deciding a winner.
He was about to jump up in delight when something struck his neck and pitch black darkness took over him as he blacked out.
Sarmad had a grim look on his face as he had just knocked out his rival. Just as the Evil Side predicted, he had gone and absorbed the Snow White Crystal until it had shrunk to the same size as the Black Night Crystal. Apparently the Good Side had sensed his presence and had come to him to ask him what he was doing.
*Flashback*
“Tell me,” said Sarmad as the Good Side intently listened, “the Evil Side told me that if any of the Crystals were to be destroyed, you both would cease to exist. Is that true?”
The Good Side stared at him for a minute and silence overtook them. “It is indeed true.”
It was Sarmad’s turn to gaze at his Good Side as the quiet overtook them once again.
“You’ve absorbed the Snow White Crystal. Bold move from you,” said the Good Side, disturbed by the silence.
“Thanks,” said Sarmad.
“Did you know you can absorb the remains of the Black Night Crystal as well?” inquired the Good Side.
“But you’ll die,” protested Sarmad, “and there is no telling if I would be a good person or evil. I would lose all the influence from you.”
“I trust you so much that I know that you’ll make the correct decision,” said the Good Side. “You can and shall do it.”
“No!” said Sarmad, raising his voice. “I refuse to let anybody die on my watch. Much less because of me.” He calmed down. “I’ll do this the old fashioned way.”
“You can never kill the Evil Side because he is a part of you however he can torture you for all of eternity so that you’d allow him to take control of the body. Or he might simply destroy you by killing me. He has no qualms about indirectly killing himself because he knows that you’d suffer as well. He’s pure, unrestrained evil! He wants to do all this so that he can rule this body instead of you,” said the Good Side, his teal eyes unusually sad and dim. “You must destroy the Black Night Crystal.”
“I can’t.”
“You must!”
“I can’t kill someone as pure as you,” insisted Sarmad. “I’m sorry.”
“Then the Evil Side has already won,” the Good Side shrugged. “Remember, Sarmad, if you don’t destroy the Black Night Crystal and kill the Evil Side, I will suffer something far worse than death – I shall suffer knowing that the Evil Side is about and could come hunt me down and I wouldn’t even be able to defend myself because my Crystal has been absorbed by someone other than me and so I am defenseless. On the other hand, the Evil Side can always hurt me because he himself has absorbed the Crystal and thus has the strength to destroy me.”
“B-but-” began Sarmad.
“I shall now take my leave,” interrupted the Good Side. No sooner had he spoken these words, he began to fade away into nothingness.
*End Flashback*
“I shall have to destroy the Black Night Crystal,” concluded Sarmad, walking towards the pitch black chunk of Crystal. He raised his arms and prepared to smash the Crystal. “Forgive me, Good Side for taking away your life.” He bought his arms down and in one powerful blow, destroyed the Crystal.
“No!” shouted the Evil Side, rising and glaring at his original with killing intent. “What have you done?! You-You destroyed the Crystal! Now both myself and the Good Side shall cease to exist.” He calmed himself and he began to disintegrate into oblivion. “Ha! I hope that you become a killing machine when you wake up. I don’t need to be here because without the influence of the Good Side, you shall be my replacement.” He maniacally laughed as he fragmented into many small pieces which flew up to the sky and vanished.
Sarmad was mourning over his loss, when the Good Side appeared before him. The Original looked up in shock, hoping that his Good Side had somehow survived but his hopes were crushed because the Good Side was, in fact, disintegrating into nothingness just as his counterpart had done earlier.
“Thank you,” Two words that meant so much to Sarmad had been voiced by his Good Side before he split into many small fragments that flew up to the sky, only to disappear before long.
“Your welcome.”
*End Sarmad’s Nightmare*
“Come on Sarmad, you can do this,” encouraged Zack to the unconscious and struggling man. It had been a minute since Leo had arrived and it was a miracle that Sarmad was still breathing. Around twenty seconds ago, Boris had put the grinded Hour Berry at Sarmad’s lips who had instinctively swallowed.
Suddenly Sarmad relaxed and his friends feared the worst.
“Is he, well you know…?” said Zack.
“No, he is alive and well for now,” said Boris, checking the pulse points of the neck and wrist. “I don’t know what’ll happen now. Either he’ll die within seconds, or he’ll rise up.”
Leo was silent and he stared at Sarmad’s body making many quiet prayers. He knew that there was a low chance of survival for the man but he couldn’t help but hope that he would get up and smile that goofy smile of his while nervously laughing.
A few silent and disturbing seconds passed when Sarmad coughed loudly and cleared his throat. His companions grew hopeful and their hope was not in vain.
For a few more seconds later, Sarmad rose up.
“Ouch, my head,” he groaned, “God knows how much it hurts.” Sarmad remembered all that had happened.
Getting shot by one of Mike’s men and then confronting both his Evil and Good sides. He had thought that he would forget everything, but he remembered it all and was shocked to see that he was not thinking hateful thoughts even though he didn’t have the Good Side in his sub-conscious. He supposed that it was just luck although he realized that he still had his pride, boastfulness and the wish for a challenge, all of which were supposed to be influenced by the Evil Side. Sarmad deduced that he managed to make a choice and thankfully it was the correct one.
“Sarmad!” said Zack excitedly and with a childish squeal as he gave his friend a wild hug and Sarmad groaned again as the hug was too tight for him. “Oh sorry.” Zack remembered that Sarmad was still pretty weak and sheepishly smiled.
“Well done Sarmad,” complimented Boris and Sarmad grinned at him. He looked at Leo who gave him a welcome nod which Sarmad knew was all he could get from him.
“Well thanks, I guess,” said Sarmad, not knowing what to say.
“Anyway, what’s our next move?” asked Zack, “I mean, we don’t have a Cyber-Drive so how do we get back?”
“We need to question the remaining members of Mike’s men and Giro and Malince,” answered Boris in a serious tone.
“They won’t speak,” said Leo solemnly. Everyone turned to look at him. “They still believe that someone or something will save them and they have enough loyalty to 8th Solar not to talk.”
“Then I think we should dispose of them,” said Sarmad.
“I agree,” said Zack.
“I disagree. We should not kill them until we believe that they will be an obstacle,” said Boris.
“I agree with what you just said, professor but you do know that as long as they are alive, our lives are in big danger,” countered Zack trying to be civil. While usually calm and mischievous, he liked to fight for what he believed to be right and by the look of things a fight was about to erupt.
After a few more civil exchanges, both Zack and Boris erupted into a verbal brawl.
“You’re wrong!” bellowed Boris, “We both know that if we kill them, we shall carry the guilt forever.”
“Enough of your sentimental rubbish!” Zack returned the loud tone, “If we don’t kill them soon, we won’t be around to carry the guilt.”
“You know, I’m afraid that I’m going to have to agree with Zack on this one. Those guys are cunning and crafty and they’ll soon find a way out of their fix,” said Leo.
Boris looked at Sarmad for support who said nothing but murmur under his breath, “Philopolemicists.”
Both Boris and Zack turned around and stared at Sarmad in utter shock and said together in a surprised voice, “Did Sarmad just use a big word?”
“The world must be ending,” commented Leo humorlessly.
“I agree,” said both Boris and Zack together.
“Very funny, guys,” Sarmad rolled his eyes. “But to be honest, I’ve got to agree with Zack on this one too. If they manage to escape, there is a threat that they might wreck havoc in this timeline. They have the resources to do so anyway.” Everyone was surprised once again – Sarmad had never said anything that included executing an unarmed prisoner. Something must have happened.
“How can they have the resources if their Time Machine is broken and ours is without a Cyber-Drive?” added Boris trying to convince Zack.
The two philopolemicists continued to argue while Sarmad meekly listened to the two debate-lovers and occasionally held back a guffaw at how Boris could go from a serious scientist to a childish debater. Of course, he didn’t know how childish he himself was, but oh well.
In the hullaballoo no one noticed Leo suddenly pricking his ears. He had heard something – Something that suspiciously sounded like the rustling of a person’s feet against the floor. He listened carefully again and upon hearing the familiar sound again, he slipped out of sight and left the cave in which they had been staying until Sarmad recovered.
“No, no, no. They have done too much wrong to ever redeem themselves,” argued Zack.
“Everyone deserves another chance,” shot back Boris fiercely. Zack was about to make a reply when a man unexpectedly came inside the cave and gazed at the men while Sarmad instinctively took out his revolver.
The man was wearing clothes that were primarily old-fashioned – He wore a bright colored tunic which had many strange patterns embedded on it and seemed to be made of heavy and sturdy wool that was folded over the upper corner for some reason or the other. Over it he wore a cloak which was made of the same material and was draped diagonally over the shoulder and hid a skin bag that he was holding however it could be seen by everyone who was currently looking at him. In addition, he wore ancient sandals which had a strap tied around the heels and in his arms he carried a sharpened spear. His amber colored eyes were hardened but if one were to look deep inside they would find a child’s innocence.


“Who are you?” demanded Sarmad, pointing his revolver at the stranger’s chest.
“υτό που είναι εσείς που κάνετε εδώ?” said the man with a weird accent.
“That’s Greek for ‘What are you doing here?’” explained Zack who knew twenty different languages. Zack then went to a long string of Greek asking questions here and there and the man answered willingly.
“Well,” said Zack finally, “this man lives in this cave so we are currently trespassing, however I have explained everything about the Time Machine to him and he understood. It is indeed very surprising he understood. The man offers a road to a mountain called Shark’s Teeth where there is another person from the future.”
“What?” cried everyone, astonished.
“It’s a pity you won’t be alive to meet this heroic man of the future,” said a voice. Everyone looked around and were shock to see that it was Giro who was standing tall with Malince and not only the remains of Mike’s men, but additional men, over Leo who was lying down unconscious and had a bruise on his head and some blood over there as well.

Suddenly Boris gave a loud scream – The despicable Greek had stabbed him with his spear and it would have been an immediate death if Zack wouldn’t have pounced on him.
Although he had just argued with the man, Zack refused to allow Boris to die before him and he attacked him with all his might.
Sarmad and Boris who was in an unimaginable amount of pain just looked on. Sarmad was about to go help him when Boris asked him to not to do so as Zack deserved an honorable fight. Sarmad reluctantly obliged to this request of Boris and went to help him.
Zack and the Greek fought fiercely punching each other with the Greek trying to reach his spear while Zack trying to reach his revolver. They gave a kick to each other and then Zack gave a hook from his right hand and gave a roundhouse kick before the Greek could do anything about it. But to his dismay he managed to dodge the kick and sent one of his own. He quickly tried to extract the spear from Boris’s stomach but instead Sarmad standing next to Boris, practically daring him to come forward. The Greek was making his decision when Zack pounced on him once again even though he was bleeding in numerous parts of his body. Zack was literally on the Greek and showered him with punches and kicks and even scratches.
They both were trying to prolong the fight so as to tire down their opponent but due to their incredible resilience, none of them gave up.
“You traitor,” roared Zack in the language of Greek.
“Λυπάμαι για να γίνει αυτό,” replied the Greek in a gloomy sort of way.
“What do you mean you’re sorry?” said Zack in Greek and in a loud tone that would make a microphone sound like the squeaking of a mouse. “We trusted you and you betrayed us. You’re a treacherous fiend.” Zack knew that he was being hard on the man since he didn’t know why he had joined Giro and Malince but he had fatally wounded Boris – His mentor – And he would not allow that to go unpunished.
Since Zack was in deep thought, his instincts and skills were slightly weakened and thus he lost his footing and fell down. Within an instant the Greek quickly took out another spear from his skin bag and pointed it at Zack’s neck.
The others gasped. Surely Zack wasn’t going to die? They had never imagined that one of them would get killed in such a trip.
Sarmad tried to reach Zack even though he knew that he was too slow and would never be able to make it.
He didn’t have to as bang went a gun and the Greek dropped his weapon and screamed in pain. He clutched his shoulder where he was shot and tried to stop too much blood from oozing out. However he got lucky and manage to survive.
It was Leo who shot the gun. Even when wounded and his pride shattered into millions of pieces, he still had enough courage and strength not to give up and allow evil to prevail and defeat him, of all people. All of this was very dramatic.
“What the heck just happened?” wondered Sarmad aloud. Zack dragged himself up and Leo who had just saved Zack fainted with exhaustion, having used up all of his energy to save his friend. But before he collapsed, he grinned a small smile – Not his usual smirk, but instead a proper and genuine smile that friends give to each other.
Malince scowled and kicked the unconscious Leo with anger.
Zack attempted to examine Boris while Sarmad reached out for Leo. But before he could Giro put the barrel of a gun next to Leo’s head and both Sarmad’s and Zack’s blood went cold.
“Nobody move or your friend here dies a gruesome and grotesque death,” threatened Giro and then said to one of Mike’s men, “Tie them all up including Boris. They all shall suffer for Mike’s death.” Giro knew how loyal the men were to Mike and thus he cleverly manipulated them by using Mike’s death as motivation.
Sarmad, Boris, Zack were all tied up but Leo was dragged away with them. Their adversaries said that they would leave them here and left while one of the men had roughly dragged Leo away and constantly kicked him in a cruel way. Meanwhile, the Greek got up nursing himself of the wounds that Leo inflicted. Zack made sure that nobody was nearby and then signaled him to come and asked him something in Greek.
“Το άτομο μου έδωσε αυτό για τη βοήθεια τον,” replied the Greek, holding up a mirror. Zack quickly shot another question which the man eagerly replied to as well. They kept on doing this until Zack stopped.
“The man only joined our enemies for they gave him a mirror which is very rare around here,” he said, “He will willingly help us if we promise to give him ten more mirrors later. The story of the man in Shark’s Teeth is true, though and he will help us to get there if we give him an additional ten mirrors which if we return home I plan to come back and give them to him, if I have to. Leo is currently being tortured by them…”
At this point they heard a scream of Leo. Everyone was shocked – Leo never screamed or anything such as this because in his opinion they were ‘weak and foolish emotions that nobody needs because they help in nothing,’ and because he had enough pride to make a lion look shameless.
“It’s a pity we can’t do anything about it, or can we?” said Zack mournfully, “Well, Leo’s sharp ears had picked up this man’s movement earlier so he slipped out to check on the prisoners who had escaped thanks to the Greek. Well the men made a deal with the Greek and gave him a mirror and asked him to trick you which he accepted, regretfully. Our enemy bumped with Leo who tried to fight back but was outnumbered. He was hit in the head with a rock which was laying there.” Suddenly they heard another scream from Leo. Zack muttered something in Greek to the Greek who untied their knots.
“Boris, will you be able to fight?” asked Sarmad with concern.
“What?! Of course I will! It was just a spear although it was sharpened. Trust me I am as healthy as a man who just ate dinner,” replied Boris with confidence and a laugh as he rose up although he winced slightly, “I tell you Zack and Sarmad I am going to help our country and get those photos.”
The screaming continued and it was horrid to listen to. How could Leo, of all people, be brought into such a weak and powerless state? They tried to figure out where the screaming was coming from and finally found out that it was coming from straight ahead where the Time Machine was.
“There,” shouted Boris. They hurried to where the screaming was coming from. It was very painful for the men to listen to one of their allies suffer in pain. Yet they could do nothing. Zack and the Greek began to talk loudly in Greek about the ways people of this time lived. Zack was doing this to take his mind off the loud, painful screaming of Leo.
“Silence!” commanded Boris, “Bunch of fools!” They all became sound, knowing that Boris was right and they should keep quiet.
Suddenly Sarmad signaled them to get down. They saw their friend Leo tied to a tree with Giro and Malince asking him questions to which he would reply with an insult. After that they would get frustrated and would hurt him and do all types of sick, terrible and downright wrong things to him. Leo was so frail currently that he looked as if he were dying. Sarmad lifted his revolver.
“I am sick of them,” he said grimly and angrily. He was done allowing the two to live and change. The remains of his Evil Side must have influenced him because he mercilessly fired at the chest of Malince who immediately fell down, dead. It was a direct hit. Ruby red blood began to ooze from his chest where he had been shot while Giro gazed at the dead body with astonishment and gloominess. He fell on his knees and actually began to cry and begging whoever was watching to bring his friend back to life.
“Bring him back,” he sobbed.
Giro looked as if it were him who was killed instead of Malince. Indeed Giro was very upset. Malince was his first and best friend. Giro looked behind and was shocked to see the party of people holding either a gun or a spear. Giro was usually a very tough person and was never scared of anything but at the moment he had turned white after seeing his not only his partner but also friend killed by Sarmad.
After noticing how genuinely upset and angry Giro became, Sarmad immediately regretted killing Malince.
“Malince,” he yelled. No reply, “Malince.” Then he started to curse Sarmad under his breath. Already he missed Malince. The two had never been apart and had faced everything together. The punishments, Giro got, Malince took them with him even if it wasn’t his fault and Giro would do the same.
“I will spare you, Giro, but if I get my eyes on you doing terrible things, I promise you one way or another I will kill you,” said Sarmad, narrowing his eyes. Although he was remorseful and regretful of killing Malince, Sarmad would not let Giro notice that.
Giro simply got up, lifted Venus and with great difficulty began dragging him away, mumbling curses and other inaudible things
Suddenly Mike’s men arrived and saw the scene. They immediately understood what happened and braced themselves for an all-out fight. Sarmad gave a smirk and signaled his friends who lifted their weapons and attacked Mike’s men. Giro did not take part in it but simply dragged Malince away. Everyone shouted and fought each other however some of Mike’s men were not armed so they took some rocks or branches and fought using them.
In the hullabaloo Sarmad sneaked to where Leo was.
“Are you alright? Can you fight?” he asked Leo.
“No and no,” replied Leo weakly. While he was tired and weak, his eyes still held a tint of his former glory. Sarmad untied his knots and took him to a corner away from the fight which was looking more like a war. Leo was clearly in a terrible state and looked as if he were dead. His arm was potentially broken and his lips and nose were bleeding profusely. That was not all though. On the ground was a sharp needle, which Sarmad guessed was used to torture the poor man.
“You may need this,” he said giving him a gun and then leaving him but when he came to the fight he saw a dreadful sight.
Bodies were lying down all over and among those bodies was Boris’s. The professor’s shoulder was bleeding profusely and his face was covered in mud and bruises. One of the few people standing that did not include him were the Greek, Zack and three of Mike’s men, two of which were using branches as their weapon. Sarmad blinded by rage and frustration did not notice another of Mike’ men sneak behind him with a branch, about to attack him.
“Die, Sarmad,” he yelled about to strike him when suddenly he fell down. It was Leo, who even though lay injured still had his burning spirit and a gun. Something struck Sarmad; Leo had changed from Sarmad’s rival to his ally to his friend.
He didn’t know when or how but somewhere and somehow Leo had bonded with him so much that he actually became his friend whether he liked it or not. And perhaps after denying it for so long, he finally accepted it and lived with it. His noble actions were complete proof of that. Leo may appear to be silent, cold and heartless but in actuality he lacked all of those traits, instead he was a friendly person but he hid such traits and buried them away so that he would seem heartless.
Despite of the horrific past Leo had occasionally mentioned, he remained sane and continued to have a heart of gold. Sarmad noticed that his allies needed some help and thus joined the battle field after glancing at the powerless Leo for a split second.
“Looks like you need some help,” he said to Zack, making his way to him.
“About time, where were you anyway?” asked Zack. However he received no reply from Sarmad as the enemies shot their hands and the guns flew away. The two clutched their hands in great pain and noticed a bruise on each of them.
“Σύλληψη,” yelled the Greek from a distance throwing a couple of spears at his friends who caught them.
“I bet that means ‘catch,’” guessed Sarmad. He and Zack were now standing back to back with their spears and with a serious look on their usually smiling faces.
“How’d you know?” replied Zack and suddenly picked up a branch and threw it at the man who was using a gun as his weapon. It hit him straight in the hand and his gun landed away and also caused him a purple bruise on his previously spotless hand. The man howled with rage and pain. He picked up the same branch as his weapon.
“Seems obvious,” said Sarmad, enjoying their playful banter.
“Looks like things just got interesting,” said Zack trying to drop the topic as it was making him lose his focus and concentration.

Sarmad and Zack stood back to back surrounded by two dangerous enemies of their each holding a sharp and pointy branch. As for Sarmad and Zack, they were holding sharpened old fashioned spears. They looked rather comical, dressed as modern humans while using old fashioned spears.
“On three,” whispered Sarmad, “One, two, three, go!” They all suddenly pounced on the men bravely each of them holding their own.
One of the more fierce fights was the one in which the Greek was fighting. He was using a spear against another of Mike’s men who was holding a branch that looked as if it could cut a head off. They both held their own until the enemy lost his footing. In an instant the Greek was on top of him, frantically murmuring inaudible words in his native language. Suddenly the man, whose name was Tower, kicked him while lying down. The Greek slipped however bravely accepted the pain and stood up before he could be attacked. By that time his adversary was also up.
“You have my respect, Greek,” said Tower, “It’s a shame that I have to finish you. Instead, why don’t you join us?”
The Greek did not respond, not understanding what his foe was saying. Upon receiving no response, Tower felt that he was being mocked and bitterly attacked him while his opponent became defensive. Tower failed to notice that while he was slowly tiring, the Greek had a lot of power and skill left. However the Greek also did not notice that his own defenses were gradually crumbling.
Both of the men were soon exhausted but bravely continued occasionally stopping and taking circles, mocking each other in their own language but yet none of them stopped. Finally the two gave on final slash to each other’s sword but the strain on their bodies was too much and they finally yielded and collapsed.
Overall the fact that the match was conducted using a spear and a branch, yet still was impressive, called for a fabulous match. The participants gave it their all and despite losing, a small smile was on their face as they knew that they had given it their all.
“My dear Greek, I hope that you and I have another match in the future,” said Tower before losing consciousness.
Meanwhile, Sarmad was fighting another of the men whose name was Geo. They too held their own and would not give up, knowing the torture and shame that the loser might have to face. Geo was a master swordsmen and very talented. His skills were second to none and he was probably the most skilled fighter among all of the fighters. Unknown to Sarmad, he was also a former champion of sword fighting however he was very modest about his skills and did not brag unlike most talented swordsmen. Instead, he silently fought and tried to look for a flaw in his opponent’s moves, while realizing that he had much to work on, as even he was not perfect and could lose a fight.
Often Sarmad noticed a glint of respect, or a small glimmer of admiration in his opponent’s already sparkling eyes. Sarmad himself was proud of the fact that his opponent respected him just as he himself respected him. In Sarmad’s eyes no match was better than one in which both of the participants had mutual respect for each other.
Sarmad might have been physically stronger but he did not have the experience that Geo had. Therefore he was at a disadvantage. However he was too obstinate for his own good and refused to accept defeat. This time though, his obstinacy was a blessing in disguise as it prevented him from giving up.
Their weapons slashed against each other, equally and for some time no one was winning nor was anyone losing but after a while Sarmad began to lose stamina. He tried his best not to stop but every human has a limit. Sarmad began to lose his footing of which his opponent took advantage and gave him a hook that knocked him down and despite being conscious, he couldn’t muster up the strength to rise up.
“Guess this is my future,” he said, after which he made a small prayer. Geo as about to finish him when a roar echoed and then a few small trees collapsed at the mere echoes of a beast’s roar that send chills down everybody’s spine.
Everyone shivered as a dinosaur stomped its way and gazed at the men. The beast looked terrible but his eyes told a different story. They were full of innocence and showed that it was also somewhat frightened. Zack who had just killed his opponent, started to wonder why he never had seen this type of one.
“Of course,” he said. “It is undiscovered right now. I must remember to take a photo.”
“No time for a History lesson, Zack,” said Sarmad who had survived when Geo stopped to stare at the beast with awe. Sarmad had taken the opportunity to strike him straight at the heart. Geo stood still and did not move for a few seconds. Then slowly he collapsed. As gracious as he felt by winning his fight, he could not help but feel guilty at killing such a talented swordsman.
“We got to get out of here,” he added, as he didn’t want to take any sort of risk, in case the dinosaur’s intentions were hostile. They both hurried to grab their partners and then planned to go to the Time Machine to take shelter, Sarmad picked up the Greek and Leo and Zack hastily carried Boris. He gazed at the dinosaur in awe. How could such a fearsome and ugly dinosaur seem so peaceful?
The dinosaur’s body was the size of a mammoth with hair sticking out disgustingly. It was standing on all of its four legs and it had a couple of horns in its head which was larger than both Zack’s and Sarmad’s entire bodies together. The beast’s tail was as large as its head with a sharp pin type of thing that looked as if it could kill a man in one, clean, swoop. All in all it was a most fearsome and tough looking creature.
The men who had reached the Time Machine stared at it in awe. The large beast saw a small animal that looked like a modern rabbit run across him but it did not bother to attack or harm it. The animal suddenly returned from wherever it had hidden, holding a carrot in its tiny paws. The dinosaur looked at the carrot as if it was a precious child. It gave the animal a gracious look and bent to eat it. The rabbit like creature did not flinch or become frightened at all. The dinosaur ate it without chewing it at all. Once it was done, it went near a tree and stood up on its hind legs and chewed the leaves, hungrily.
“It’s an Herbivore!” exclaimed a shocked Zack, jumping with joy. He would never have guess that such a frightening creature could be so calm and peaceful. He ran outside, without any fear at all, and took many pictures with Leo’s camera after turning off flash, knowing that it might be scared of sudden light just like many animals often are. The dinosaur ignored Zack and continued to chew the leaves as if they were his life.
“Hey, Zack we have a situation here, remember,” called Sarmad, coming out of the Time Machine without Tower, Leo, Boris or the Greek.
“Sarmad,” said Zack facing him. “Why did we come here?” Sarmad paused. It was true. They had come to this time for pictures not for a war. In fact they had initially planned to come for a short while, not such a long time, but they had to until they got to Shark’s Teeth.
“Sorry, Zack,” apologized Sarmad to which Zack replied with a laugh.
“No need for an apology, I may be a future professor but I am not sensitive,” he replied.
“Look who’s talking, the guy who got all angry when I accused him of siding with our enemies,” replied Sarmad also with a laugh which Zack returned.
“Fun time is over, Sarmad” said Zack turning serious, “go get some fire wood so the Greek can wake up and we can go to Shark’s Teeth. Sarmad put on a face but left to collect firewood.
Sarmad wondered what Zack would do; perhaps he would have a nap. But Sarmad was wrong, Zack started to collect fruits, nuts and anything edible he could find. He was sure that Leo, The Greek, Sarmad and Boris if he manage to survive, deserved a treat. He would give them all a grand surprise.
He had already covered Boris’s wound with a rag and added ice from the Time Machine’s refrigerator. He could only hope that he would recover on his own because all of the Hour Berries, Leo had collected had already been grinded and used to heal Sarmad. Zack quickly cleaned his mind of all the horrific thoughts that had entered his mind and tried to think of something else.
While collecting the food he started to gaze at the dinosaur. He saw a rabbit nearby and immediately shot it and began to skin it. He soon did it and took out a lighter from his pocket.
‘Guess it will have to do,’ he thought. He roasted the rabbit with it on the little firewood he already had and after a while he went to a nearby river and put some water in everyone’s bottles and in a glass to wash the fruit with. He smiled and soon washed the fruit, wondering where Sarmad was with the firewood. An hour passed and he began to worry. He waited even more but Sarmad didn’t return
Zack was sick of waiting. Since he was a soon-to-be scientist, like all of them, he was a very impatient person. He cursed and yelled and scolded himself for telling Sarmad to go alone. He wrote a note on a piece of paper and this is what he wrote,

Dear Sarmad
I have gone to look for you as you have not come, yet. However if you come, safely without any harm, flash my torch up in the sky if it is night, and if it is day climb a tree and wave a flag or something.

P.S Do not go into the Time Machine, please, Sarmad, I am trusting you.
Zack

Zack placed the note under a rock which he had painted red so Sarmad could easily find it. Zack walked towards the jungle silently and when he reached it he suffered an unpleasant shock.
It was more of a swamp than a jungle. Vines and roots were on the ground and the branches of the many trees were covering all sunlight. While Zack usually complained about many things, he didn’t this time because he knew that the longer he stayed still, the more chance of Sarmad losing his life. Soon it was night but the jungle remained the same as no sunlight had entered earlier.
Suddenly Zack heard a groan – a deep and painful groan that almost certainly confirmed that someone or something was nearby. Zack carefully followed the noise and tried to avoid treading and snapping twigs and other things on the ground that would alert anyone of his presence.
He was slightly scared but his curiosity was far more than it and thus he continued, trying to avoid thinking of the chances that something that was very dangerous would be out there.
Perhaps a dinosaur in pain was there – or perhaps it was a human being dying. Maybe it was nothing but his imagination, but he had trouble believing that explanation. He heard the groan very distinctly and vividly again and concluded that was was coming from right ahead. But the odd thing was that there was a sort of marsh from there onwards. He quickly looked at the ground and made sure that there was no one over there.
He was walking when he stepped on something that seemed alive because he could’ve sworn that it moved. Upon close look, he realized that it was something covered in leaves, mud and water and it looked horribly disgusting and it made Zack want to go and throw up. The thing moved again and gave an evil grin.
“How dare you disturb my slumber!” cried the thing.
“Very funny,” said Zack as he rubbed the leaves and mud away from the things face. Out came the smiling face of Sarmad. “What happened?”
“A terrible monster came to me who was half vampire and half ghost and he was hungry so he bit my neck and gave me a curse so that I could never move and never tell anyone about him,” answered Sarmad, trying to be serious but the twinkle in his eyes gave it away.
“Jokes aside,” said Zack sternly. “He watches way too many movies.” This was said under his breath
“I fell down and twisted my ankle. The pain was too much and I couldn’t move so…” Sarmad trailed off, still smiling although he was injured.
Zack chuckled slightly at Sarmad’s never ending humor, but he quickly restrained himself. He was supposed to seem daunting and downright mad just like how Boris often did, but it was just not in his nature and he couldn’t do it.
He had begun to think of things that make him angry, when the two of them noticed a torch flashing from the Time Machine. Sarmad noticed how alarmed Zack looked and raised an eyebrow in curiosity. Zack quickly explained to Sarmad about the note but not about the food but Sarmad didn’t look afraid in the least.
“Let’s go check it out,” he said with a smirk.
“Right,” Zack was slightly hesitant but he would not show any type of weakness.
“You might want to pick up the logs of firewood I collected,” said Sarmad.
Zack looked at the swampy ground and noticed a few logs of wood and despite of them being insufficient, he managed to smile.
“Nice,” he said, picking them up. “So, Sarmad, you think you can walk till the Time Machine?”
“Nope,” answered Sarmad bluntly. “But if you can lift me up, I think I can limp till the Time Machine and there you can give me medical treatment.”
Zack agreed and with a little difficulty, managed to pick Sarmad up who struggled to remain balanced. Within moments he was done and gave his friend a grin.
“Thanks.”
Zack gave his buddy a nod and looked at him as he struggled to walk – or rather, limp which he eventually managed to do so.
Sarmad and Zack walked through the marshy swamp after a small incident of Zack slipping on the marsh and landing headfirst onto one of the small, dirty ponds of the swamp and Sarmad laughing like how little children are when they look at clowns. But apart from that, the trip through the bog was uneventful and they soon reached the Time Machine and they noticed a figure creeping in the shadows.
“Freeze!” cried Zack, “show yourself.”
The person who came out surprised the both of them – it was the barely alive, hard working professor, Boris.
“Don’t worry I am the one who signaled with that torch,” said Professor Boris, knowing that they were probably alarmed at seeing the torch flash. “By the way, the Greek is awake and is are fresh and well.”
At this point Boris chuckled as he remembered how The Greek continuously babbled on and on in his native language of Greek. “You might want to explain everything that happened to him. He is feeling very energetic and for some reason ecstatic. Explain what happened, in English as well.
“Surely you didn’t go inside the Time Machine?” asked Zack, anxiously.
“No,” answered Boris, “Why?”
Zack answered with only a shrug.
”Humph,” came an irritated voice voice from the distance. It was the voice of Leo as he walked towards the trio with the Greek trailing behind.
“What’s got him angry?” whispered Sarmad to Boris.
“He’s angry at the fact that he was at such a weak state earlier during our fight,” said Boris.
“I think I’m the one in the weak state right now,” said Sarmad, his eyes trailing down to his injured ankle.
“Gosh, what on Earth happened.” The worrisome and anxious version of Boris had replaced the usual Boris.
“He injured his ankle,” Zack answered for Sarmad. “Could you give him some treatment?”
“Of course,” said Boris. He beckoned to Sarmad to follow him and he walked towards the Time Machine, but before he could, Zack stopped him and nervously asked him what he wished to take from the Time Machine.
“A handkerchief and some water and some soap to cool the injury,” said Boris confused.
“I have a hanky, and there’s some water on the other side of the Time Machine. I’ll go get the soap,” Zack rubbed the back of his neck in a goofy and nervous way.
“Uh, sure,” said Boris, confused again.
Zack hurried to the Time Machine and quickly got the soap and rushed out before Boris could wander inside the Time Machine. Zack handed the soap to Boris who once again looked confused.
“Oh, I get it!” exclaimed Boris while Zack looked worried. “You want to eat the soap!” The last part was said in a serious way but it was rather comical.
Zack almost fell over in surprise and he thought of how foolish and comical Boris could become despite of being so smart when it comes to Science and such things.
“Sure professor,” said Zack, trying to talk without sarcasm.
“Right,” replied Boris, “Anyway, Sarmad this might sting slightly.” He poured the water to the wound while Sarmad winced slightly in pain. He immediately rubbed the soap against the man’s ankle and Sarmad gave a slight groan. He waited a few minutes before he tightly wrapped a handkerchief around Sarmad’s ankle and made sure that no blood could leak out and no insect could go in, especially mosquitoes.
“Thanks,” said Sarmad, rubbing the handkerchief and feeling some pain when he pressed the hanky way too hard than it was supposed to. Once he was done, he turned solemn. “Boris I have something very important to ask you which will affect the fate of the entire world.”
“What is it?” inquired Boris. Few things could make Sarmad lose his humorless expression.
“When will we eat?” said Sarmad in an amusing and humorous way.
Boris lost his balance and almost fell over while Leo gave an amused smirk. But Zack actually nodded, apparently agreeing with Sarmad.
“He’s right,” he said, “We haven’t eaten in I don’t know how long.”
“You two,” said Boris regaining his balance, “are utterly impossible.” He tried to avoid bursting into laughter while Sarmad and Zack looked confused.
“How do these two not like food like we do?” asked Sarmad.
“There must be something wrong with them,” said Zack, agreeing with Sarmad.
“We don’t have any food,” said Leo.
“Oh I can arrange for that,” said Zack, remembering the treasure he had collected earlier on.
The man asked them to shut their eyes, while taking them to the Time Machine.
He quickly went to the Time Machine to take out his collection of fruits, the rabbit he had cooked, the nuts among others. There was also some fresh lemonade which he had made when he found some lemons.
“C’mon Zack,” said Sarmad, “What is it that you want to show us?” Boris asked something around those lines while Leo remained silent and grew weary of the waiting.
“One minute,” called Zack from inside the Time Machine, taking out the eatables and drinkables. “I just need a minute.”
Sarmad contemplated opening his eyes and seeing whatever Zack wanted to show them, but he changed his mind. Although he hated long waits, he loved surprises and didn’t want to spoil it for himself and everyone else.
“Alright I’m done,” said Zack.
Sarmad, Boris and Leo instantly opened their eyes and stared at the food and their eyes bulged so much that they looked as if they would come out of their sockets. Zack grew anxious.
What if they didn’t like the food? He had spent so much time preparing the treat that he hadn’t even considered if they didn’t like it. However his worries were eased when he noticed the expressions of his allies.
Leo seemed indifferent to the sight although Zack knew that he was pleased. Boris seemed fairly happy and gave Zack a grateful grin. As for Sarmad – drool was dripping from his lips as he scanned the food with utter delight Then with speed previously thought impossible to achieve, he ran to one corner of the circle in which Zack had arranged the food, and within seconds reached the other corner.
His hands were rubbed together in glee and to him there was nothing better than the smell of food, not even a spar against Leo.
Then without asking for permission, he dug in and piled his plate with one of everything and was eating nineteen to the dozen.
“Really hit the spot,” he said through his bites which appeared quite repulsive.
“Hey stop,” shouted Boris, in a stern voice although he was smiling in an amused way.
“What is it?” asked Sarmad.
“Wash your hands first,” ordered Boris.
Sarmad’s shoulders slumped as he got up and walked towards the stream to wash his hands. He didn’t bother arguing as he knew that doing so against Boris was futile.
“Better fill your plates before Sarmad arrives and gobbles it down,” advised the professor.
He didn’t have to say that twice as within seconds everybody was piling their plates in a large amount but it was modest compared to Sarmad’s food.
“Θεωρώ ότι τα παιδιά σας να είναι αρκετά περίεργο,” said the Greek, more to himself than to his new found friends.
“Oh we’re not odd,” said Zack laughing in the language of English. Then in Greek he said to the Greek, “but just between us Boris and Leo are.” Of course the aforementioned duo didn’t understand Greek so they didn’t know what Zack had just said.
Thirty minutes earlier at a place not more than a mile away
A man was standing over an open space and had just finished burying another man and apparently he was talking to himself.
“Curse Sarmad,” he was muttering, as he labeled the man’s gravestone. “Curse them all. It’s all Mike’s fault. He had chosen me for this mission and just for me; my late friend had to come as well. I should never have told Mike about 8th Solar. Now my best friend is gone and it’s partly my fault. I could’ve just walked away when Mike’s senior approached me with the offer to join him just because of my athletic record.” He noticed a far off light flashing.
The man had enough experience to know that the light was made by a torch and not a lantern or technology that they used in this time.
“Only Sarmad and his cronies could have such a thing,” he murmured, as a smirk began to stretch across his face. “I’ll kill you if it’s the last thing I do, Sarmad.”
With that and a twisted laugh, he began to walk away, after one last glance at the grave. Meanwhile an animal, looking like a cat appeared and observed the gravestone, curiously. Etched on the gravestone was simply a name, of the buried man.
The labeled name was Malince.
Where Leo and his friends were
Within ten minutes the beautiful, blazing ball of fire called the sun had begun to melt into the sky and was waving goodbye. It’s light was being reflected by the men’s eyes and the nearby stream.
The sight was beautiful and the sun was a mixture of many colors – Red, orange, pink and purple all combined together to create what was a gorgeous sunset. But within it, there was a strip of gray which, however minute, made the sun more beautiful than it already was. Just gazing at it gave one a sense of tranquility and peace and within a few more minutes, the Sun had dissolved into the night which made the sky a midnight blue color.
Once the Sun had set, the previously soft colored Moon shined a brilliant silver glow that mesmerized all who looked upon it and looked almost as beautiful as the Sun itself looked.
The group of men sat in a circle and amusedly watched Sarmad as he hungrily gobbled down the remaining food.
Boris planned to ask what the plan was but all that came out was, “Where does it all go?”
“Good question,” said Leo with a smile – Not an amused smirk, but a genuine and legitimate smile that friends give each other.
“Hey,” said Sarmad, playfully, “It’s just that this food is so wonderful.”
“You want some candy with that?” asked Boris.
“No way. That’s fat.” Even though Sarmad loved to eat, he strictly made sure that he didn’t eat a lot of fat such as cake and brownies.
“You don’t become fat as long as you burn calories here,” replied Boris pointing at his head.
“Are you calling me stupid?!” demanded Sarmad, who was enjoying their friendly argument.
“I sure am,” answered Boris.
“I’m in a good mood so I’ll let you off the hook,” said Sarmad.
“Tomorrow we leave for Shark’s Teeth,” declared Zack, trying to avoid a fight.
Everyone agreed and grinned, having forgotten the argument they had been having earlier on. The Greek was confused by all the talk and so Zack had kindly taken the time to translate everything that was being said and the Greek also joined in the conversations and Zack translated his words as well.
The group of men listened to the Greek who told stories about this time, how people lived, ate, fought and entertained themselves.
He told the tales in a rather funny and comical way, acting out every scene and made everyone laugh out loud in a merry voice.
They were all having fun and had apparently forgotten about all of their worries and problems and just enjoyed the little time for fun that they had. The Greek also enjoyed the fun, teasing and bickering that the men did. It amazed him at how such grim people could turn into children over a single remark but either way, he had a lot fun.
All of a sudden they heard people singing songs and they were surprised to hear such things when a swamp was nearby. Thus Zack asked the Greek what it was. The Greek replied in his own language that it was a travelling circus and it was singing to attract visitors.
“Let’s go see it,” suggested Sarmad, through bites. Although they were repulsed by how disgustingly Sarmad talked while eating, the quintet agreed. They were about to leave when Sarmad stopped them and asked if he could finish his food first.
“Sure,” said Boris, despite of the fact that he wanted to see the circus there and then. He knew that waiting for Sarmad could take a while and as he was a very impatient person, it would be difficult not to twist Sarmad’s neck there and then.
After finishing every crumb of food and every drop of water, Sarmad rose up and pat his tummy in satisfaction. “Fantastic. Thanks Zack. Now let’s hurry, I don’t want to miss the circus.”
The quintet moved quietly and swiftly so as not to wake up the napping birds although they had a feeling that the graceful and beautiful singing had already done. Everything was silent except for the singing and the occasional shrill and unpleasant sound of some screeching owl.
It was only a matter of time until they saw a number of old fashioned caravans moving towards the swamp. Most of the singing was coming from outside the caravans as many people, usually women or children, were singing and walking alongside the caravans which was very difficult because of the high speed they were traveling in. However when Sarmad, Zack, Leo, Boris and the Greek went even closer, they heard many sounds of animals such as lions, birds and monkeys. In addition there were many exotic animals as well such as the click of kangaroos and the croaks of a variety of frogs. Even the howling of a wolf could be heard which was ironic considering there was a full moon.
“Hei sinä siellä,” shouted someone to Zack and his friends in an odd language.
“What language is that, Zack?” questioned Boris.
“I’m not sure,” said Zack slowly, “but I think that it’s Finnish. I don’t know much about that language so excuse me if I bungle around a bit. From what I understood he just said, ‘you there.’ Now I’m going to ask him if he can understand me.” In Finnish Zack answered the man who had shouted to them. “Voit ymmärtää minua?”
The man eagerly nodded at Zack and then said something in the same language.
“Now what did he say?” asked Sarmad.
“I think he said that he understands me and he is asking if we are here for the circus,” answered Zack.
“Well, tell him that we are,” said Boris impatiently. Leo gave a grunt that meant ‘go ahead,’ and the Greek just absentmindedly stared at the caravans.
“Okay,” said Zack. He turned to the man, who was signaling the caravans to stop which they complied with, and said something in Finnish.
“Okei,” replied the man and signaled them to come inside.
“He’s asking us to come in,” translated Zack and gave a nod to the man who hurried into the caravan, presumably to tell the crew that they had a visitor.
A few hours later
“Whew, I’m beat,” said Sarmad as he literally fell into his pile of heather in which they had planned to sleep in. Next to him Boris, Zack, Leo and even the Greek were falling into their piles so that they could have a nap.
“You said it,” said Zack.
Indeed their trip to the circus had been exhausting – First they had been taken inside the caravans and to Sarmad’s Zack’s and even Leo’s utter dismay, they found out that the women and children who were singing outside the caravans were actually slaves and Boris had to physically restrain them all to prevent them from lashing out onto the apparent slave traders.
“You know that slavery was allowed and very popular in these times and we have no right to march in this time and change their rules. That’s their job,” Boris had said when he was trying to talk sense to Sarmad, Leo and Zack. Eventually he had succeeded in calming Zack and Sarmad but Leo was a whole different thing – He had refused to allow such terrible things to go about when he was around but eventually Boris had convinced him as well. Then after apologizing to the confused circus people, they had enjoyed watching a fun show in which a tame wolf was whimpering next to a bird and the bird was scared of a turtle. Sarmad and Zack had forgotten about the slave incident but Leo had been in a sour mood the entire time because he still remembered and was angry at the slave traders however he had been slightly happy when he learnt that the slaves were treated kindly as long as they did their work well.
The men continued to lie down on the heather and reflected upon the day and eventually fell asleep without even knowing. Sarmad dozed off first, tired out by his search of firewood and the general day. Next was Zack who tried to stay awake but couldn’t do so. After him was the professor, Boris. Last was the silent Leo who was remembering his father and Jaguar and even Jupiter who he continued to wait for. These people asleep joined him in his strange dreams once he fell asleep.
A few hours later Leo woke up. He had had his rest and he had trained himself to avoid sleeping too much and to be alert at all times. He wanted to be ready for Jupiter at all times and even though some might call him insecure, he thought nothing wrong of the habit. Gazing at the sleeping men, he got up from the trampled heather and unable to curb his desire of running to use up all the energy he had, he went outside and jogged. He made quite some noise, however being as tired as his allies were they did not wake up. Rather they fell into a deeper sleep. After a few hours he stopped.
Slowly light lit up the dark sky and Leo observed the large, glowing sphere rise slowly up into the dull sky as the moon gradually faded away until it could not be seen. The sun illuminated the land and it pained the sky as pink as a sea of cotton candy and soon it was mixing with a pale yellow.
“Looks like someone is an early bird,” said Boris coming out of the Time Machine. Leo remained silent. Knowing Leo was not in the rare mood for talk, Boris took no further notice of him. Leo slipped out of sight and went towards a river. After a while the others also woke up, grumbling.
“I just can’t believe I slept first, I usually sleep last. I guess I must’ve been tired by looking for that firewood. You have any food left Zack? No? Oh well, that’s just great,” grumbled Sarmad. “I say, where’s Leo?”
His question was answered that moment for a wet Leo chose to enter the large Time Machine at that moment. He was holding a giant of a fish that looked as if it weighed a ton. Its size was incredibly large and bulky. The fish’s eyes were opened, just like its mouth was and in Leo’s bag were some fresh apples and mangoes, among other types of fruit. Leo had first had a refreshing bath and then had begun to fish.
That river was rife with fish and near its bank were many trees that defied the laws of seasons and for some reason included fruit that could not be found at that particular season. They had a large variety of fruit such as oranges, bananas, mangoes and melons. If Leo were to be honest with everyone, he would be confessing that he had actually enjoyed the time that he had spent fishing but of course he wouldn’t. There was an incredible but pleasant wind and he could practically smell the fresh water. While the current was unusually fast for a river, it was nothing that Leo couldn’t handle.
He threw the giant fish at Zack, as if it weighed nothing. Zack eyed it as if it were a precious child and wished that he could pounce on it and tear it apart with his teeth. However as mouthwatering as the fish was, he managed to curb that desire with great difficulty. Zack managed to clean the fish of its spikes and then cooked it over the firewood that Sarmad had collected the day before.
‘Good old Leo,’ thought Sarmad, eating the fish, hungrily. Leo himself barely ate anything as he had eaten all he wanted at the river.
“Say, what about the Time Machine?” asked Sarmad. “We can’t carry it with us.
“Sure we can,” answered Boris with a smirk. He pressed a button on the Time Machine and immediately like magic the Machine reverted to its cube form. “It’s called technology.”
“Oh right, I forgot,” said both Sarmad and Zack in a simultaneous voice.
“How could you?” asked Boris. However Sarmad and Zack chose to ignore him and instead just gazed at the Sun which was now high above their heads.
In a few hours they had taken the useful things and burnt the useless things in a campfire. They each had to carry their own luggage. Everything except for the guns went in the bags. The luggage consisted of a fishing hook, leftover beans and nuts, Water, the Time Machine cube, important papers of Boris and Zack, a couple of torches and a camera. The papers took a lot of place and Sarmad insisted on burning them too but Boris and his assistant would not budge. Instead of placing them in the bags, Leo put his Sabers safely behind him in a sword case that was attached to his back.
Soon they were ready to go. The Greek was leading them as he alone knew the location of Shark’s Teeth. Walking slowly, Sarmad remembered how he used to believe that the Time Machine would not work. How he sneered at Boris, laughing when he was working, taunting his Time Machine, begging him to stop wasting his time.
‘Guess I owe Boris an apology,’ thought Sarmad. But then he changed his mind when he remembered how it was Boris who had taunted him into coming into the past my insulting his pride and since he was too stubborn for his own good, Sarmad refused to apologize.
The day went by without an incident except for when Boris who was tired, began to bully Sarmad into a fight which he gladly accepted, however Zack and Leo managed to calm things before they got out of hand and both Sarmad and Boris made amends, with Boris saying that he didn’t have a good rest so he was slightly cranky.
Gradually the sun began to descend and the grass and trees shone like stars. As the light faded, animals began to scurry home lest they get lost in the darkness of the night. The light fled to other parts of the world and the night sky became dominant. The men enjoyed the twilight and wind by lying down in a steady slope.
Noises began to decline and silence took dominance. Nothing moved or voiced its concerns, except for the occasional hoot of an owl, hunting for mice or a roar of a night dinosaur, searching for its home or its dinner. Enjoying the silence that was rare the men were in no hurry to disrupt the silence.
Eventually the night became cool and they had no other choice except to find a place to harbor themselves. After some searching they found a place where they could stay – a dark cave. Thus that was where they sheltered themselves. It was thrilling to them although most people would have rather been frightened. Boris took out a bright torch and a sheaf of his papers and began to examine them. Leo remained silent wondering what had happened to Jaguar. Zack thought of Shark’s Teeth and how they would get there. The Greek practiced with his spear determined to do whatever he could to help his new friends and Sarmad wondered how the other man from the future on Shark’s Teeth came to this time.
“Someone will be put on watch, in case,” said Boris, suddenly.
“I’ll take the first turn and will wake Zack up by two. He will watch until four and then wake up Boris who at six will wake up Leo. By seven Leo will wake us all up,” said Sarmad. Everyone agreed and after a few minutes of silence everybody but Sarmad lay down and enjoyed the cool wind before finally falling asleep. Sarmad loaded his gun and got it ready in case someone comes. He heard a group of rabbits having a meeting and were probably wondering who the people inside the cave were. Sarmad also heard a distant nocturnal dinosaur’s roar who was probably hunting for a meal which he eventually found as Sarmad didn’t hear it again.
A while later at two’ o clock, he woke up Zack. Although Zack did not want to wake up, Sarmad threatened to throw a glass of water on him. The threat worked and Zack woke up, huffing to himself and muttering about how life was unfair.
On Zack’s watch nothing happened as well and he just stood still, wishing an intruder would come so he could have a thrill. Zack soon felt himself drifting to sleep but he just managed to prevent that disaster could happen. Without a doubt, he would be Boris would kill or at least tear of a limb of his if that happened. Time passed gradually but eventually it was four. He woke up Boris who immediately woke up.
Zack soon fell asleep and was soon breathing heavily which annoyed Boris greatly. Boris considered working on his documents but changed his mind. His brain wasn’t working at that time.
Nothing happened on Boris’s watch as well. As soon his watch hit six, he woke up Leo who silently got up. Before Boris slept he saw the beautiful red ball which most people call the Sun creep out of its shadows like a spy. Leo sat on the floor instead of standing and kept his eyes glued on the cave entrance. It seemed time passed quickly and by seven he woke up his allies.
Sarmad woke up first, being fresh. After him with groans his friends woke up. He and Leo went outside, enjoying the beautiful day. They heard birds chirping around them gracefully. All sorts of birds descended to the ground near Sarmad and gazed at the quintet, chirping with sheer happiness.
There were many birds – Parrots, robins, magpies, ravens, crows, pigeons, partridges, larks. In addition there were many birds that were born with an aggressive nature, but were very peaceful here such as eagles, hawks, lammergiers, African Ostriches and an extinct bird called Titanis Walleri.
Another rare bird called Kagu which was also identified by Boris was also there.
A robin with an extremely red breast actually perched on Sarmad’s shoulder. Sarmad liked this very much and had the pleasure of giving them a fruit which he had taken from a tree.
A parrot got a guava from a tree and came to Leo and gave it to him. Leo picked up the fruit and gave a grunt.
“Thanks little guy.”
A loud and extremely scary noise frightened all the birds away. Leo turned around, calmly and he saw a flying, pink dinosaur with a very yellow beak. It howled again and again, painfully. That was when Leo saw that it was being hunted by a land dinosaur.
The dinosaur was a tall one standing on its hind legs and was roaring loudly, making everything afraid. It was brown with horns on its large head and a grey tail was following it. However ugly it was, it was a rare sight to see. The brute continued to roar in a ferocious manner, attempting to catch its prey.
Leo and Sarmad realized that the poor dinosaur, who was being hunted, had one of its wings broken and so it could not fly any higher than it was. The dangerous anger that resided within Leo had now taken control of him and consumed him. Taking out his gun, he aimed at the brute’s ugly chest.
“Do it, Leo,” yelled his friends coming out. Leo looked at them, gave a smile and fired. Thankfully it was a direct hit and the beast immediately died on the spot. The prey realized it was safe and without even giving a gesture of gratitude, it slowly flew away as it was still injured.
The robin and parrot returned but the rest of the birds were still too frightened to come out.
“Nice bird, Leo,” teased Zack. “Never knew you liked birds.”
“Never knew that you had the courage to tease me in front of my face,” Leo teased back in a friendly manner and went to feed the parrot.
“Leo is acting socially?” said Zack to himself. He shrugged. “Miracles never cease to happen. And neither do the times when Leo surprises me.” He turned to look at Sarmad and said to himself – “I don’t know why I can’t trust you anymore, Sarmad. Why am I feeling this way?”
“The bags are ready,” said Boris after a few minutes, “everyone go and get your own. We are leaving.”
The robin and parrot did not go, rather they stayed at their respective owner’s shoulder.
“Hey Boris,” called Zack, around ten seconds before they left, “I’m starting to doubt Sarmad’s loyalty.”
“You think?” inquired Leo, “the person I’m wondering about is our friend.” He pointed to the Greek.
“You two dare accuse two trustworthy people of treason!” exclaimed Boris “didn’t expect you of all people to accuse them.
“Not at all,” said Leo, surprising the duo. “I ain’t accusing the Greek, rather, I’m commending him. When I meant that I’m wondering about him, I meant that I was wondering if he could get any braver. He has the courage to help us and for what it’s worth, he has my full respect and I doubt that he’ll ever betray us.”
“But think about it,” pleaded Zack.
“Quiet!” said Boris sternly, “here he comes.” Indeed there was Sarmad, ready with his bag.
“Shall we go?” asked Sarmad, cheerfully.
‘Zack is up to something,’ thought Leo gazing at said person. Leo then left one of his blue eyes was always on Zack.
“Yes let’s,” answered Boris, “but before that, Sarmad could I talk to you for a moment.”
“Sure,” came the reply, “is it serious by any chance.”
“Not at all, just something about the Robin.”
“No time for that, doc,” said Zack shaking his head.
“No! I need to talk to him,” disagreed Boris, his eyes moving from Leo’s face to Zack’s and then to the Greek’s before finally resting on Zack who reluctantly nodded.
Sarmad didn’t say anything. He could tell that what they were about to talk about was much serious than it sounded. Boris beckoned to Sarmad, and the two walked a short distance, out of hearing range.
Meanwhile, Zack was clearly nervous. He was fidgeting and would not stop moving constantly. Sweat was pouring down his face like a bucket of water. His face was red with worry. He knew that if Sarmad found out what he had been accused of, he would erupt in anger.
Sarmad was generally a very nice and cheerful person, but when accused of something he didn’t do, he got enraged and thundered like a wild storm that could not be tamed. If he were honest with himself, Zack knew that there was no way that Sarmad could switch sides but Zack had become so frustrated with being trapped in the time period, that it was clouding his sense of mind.
Suddenly they heard an angry shout from Sarmad. The shout showed Sarmad’s emotions as once could easily notice what he was feeling. The shout was full of anger, betrayal but most of all, it showed sorrow. Sarmad’s teal eyes looked directly at Zack’s guilty ones. The rage and sadness that he felt was too much for Zack to handle and he broke down.
“I’m honestly sorry!” he wailed, loudly. Sarmad looked as if he hadn’t heard him and turned to look at Leo, who was standing calmly as if he had been expecting this.
Leo noticed the legitimate pain that Zack was feeling and relaxed. He now knew that Zack wasn’t plotting anything. Rather, he was just frustrated and that had clouded his common sense. Honestly, not even Leo could ever see Sarmad as a potential enemy, he was far too pure hearted for his own good.
Sarmad’s eyes softened as he saw that Leo had forgiven Zack. He knew that Leo’s judgment was always accurate. Sarmad was still angry at Zack, but he realized that he could not stay angry at him for very long. Zack was too mischievous for that to happen. He turned to Boris.
“Thanks for informing me, Boris,” he said, before he soundly grabbed his rucksack. He gave Zack a soft and cheerful look, to let him know that he was forgiven. Zack jumped with sheer joy and happiness, as the others looked on with amusement.
After everything had been sorted out and clarified, the quintet resumed their journey. More mountains could be seen by the group and it became rather difficult for them to continue their journey and breaks became more frequent. Leo and Boris would rarely if ever complain but Sarmad and Zack asked for breaks every hour or so. Water and food was becoming scarce and eventually even Boris started grumbling.
“Argh,” yelled Zack, one hot day, “Dang it’s hot today.”
“Naturally,” declared Sarmad.
“Δείτε αυτό το βουνό?” inquired the Greek.
“Now what is that fool babbling about?” said Boris in an uncivil and disrespectful way.
“Easy there, Boris,” laughed Zack. “He’s asking us if we see that mountain there.”
“Tell him that we do,” said Sarmad.
“Ναι,” said Zack to the Greek in the latter’s language.
“Που είναι τα δόντια του καρχαρία, προορισμός μας,” said the Greek.
“That is Shark’s Teeth, our destination,” translated Zack.
“Y-yes,” stammered the Greek.
“Oh my god,” exclaimed Sarmad, “he spoke English.”
“Nice job,” congratulated Zack in Greek. Both Sarmad and Leo took turns in commending him. Even Boris who was in a bad mood congratulated him.
The Greek grinned at his new found friends. He even smiled at Leo who ignored him. Leo was above showing emotions in public – Maybe a thank you or something small but nothing more. After a bit of fussing they continued their journey. The weather became rather cold and drizzling began. Henceforth they had to take shelter under trees even though Boris advised them not to.
“Forget it professor,” Sarmad had argued when Boris insisted that they stay out of the shade of trees, “it’s only drizzling not a storm or anything.”
“That has no connection whatsoever,” Boris shot back.
“Either way professor,” said Zack, “where else do you propose we take shelter.” As Boris could not answer, they ignored him and started to gather heather for a bed.
“Hey Zack,” called Sarmad who had gone out to fetch some heather for all of them, “come over here.”
“Is it serious?” said Zack, feeling lazy.
“Quit slacking,” ordered Sarmad, “and get over here.”
“All right, all right,” said Zack scurrying towards Sarmad. “What is it?”
“Take a look.”
“No way,’ said Zack, “the rain has ended already, “I say, is there a rainbow?” He looked up and saw a rainbow and a raven coming his way. It chirped and hearing it came out the Robin and Parrot. They chirped to each other happily. Zack noticed a note tied on its claws.
“Well,” he acknowledged, “a note.”
“What is written on it?” interrogated Sarmad. “Hey Boris and Leo come here, will you?” Unlike Zack, they came out almost instantly. Zack called The Greek. Sarmad quickly explained what happened while Zack read out the note in Greek.
“Uh, Zack,” said Boris, “English please.”
At the same time the Greek said, “Διαβάσετε ξανά.”
“Of course I can read it again,” replied Zack, “but first in English. This is what it says.”

“The Spartan Court demands the escaped convict you harbor.
If you do not handover the Greek, Calhoun, we will be forced to start a war with Athens. We have more men, more cattle, more spears than Athens will ever have. Give us the Athenian known as Calhoun.”
Signed xxx
Then Zack recited the note in Greek.
“Αυτό πρέπει να είναι οι Σπαρτιάτες,” yelled The Greek, in shock. “Είμαι Calhoun.”
“You really mean you are Calhoun?” demanded Zack in Greek.
“Δεν είναι δικό μου λάθος,” whined the Greek, “Οι Σπαρτιάτες πήρε μακριά μου γονείς, ποτέ δεν θα συγχωρήσουν τους.”
So you’re saying that you are Calhoun and because the Spartans took away your parents, you have been after them?” translated Zack.
“Αλλά δεν θέλω προκλήθηκε εξαιτίας μου,” babbled the Greek. “Παράδοση τους για μένα.”
“Even though they took them away you don’t want war caused because of you,” translated Zack, “but I say that you should be staying here with us.”
“No Zack,” said Sarmad and Boris together, “it’s his choice, he doesn’t want war, let him go.”
“But Boris,” said Zack.
“No Zack,” ordered Boris. “Tie a note on the raven’s neck or somewhere. He’ll be found under this tree tomorrow at noon.”
When he was writing the note alone Zack muttered to himself, “maybe you can’t help him, but I can.” Zack had grown quite attached to Calhoun and had formed some sort of bond with him. By communicating with him so often, he had become good friends with the man and didn’t want to throw away that friendship.
“No Zack,” said a voice.
“Who is that?” he demanded.
“Leo,” came the answer.
“What do you want,” he asked without turning around.
“Don’t try any fancy trick to free him,” said Leo in a cold, low and whispery tone. “If you get caught we all will have a bounty on us and war will begin.”
“War will begin, remember,” said Zack, “Sparta will start the war either way and Athens will lose, that is what History tells us.”
“We don’t want it to start while we are here,” said Leo. “According to Boris there is still a decade left until the war begins between Athens and Sparta. Besides this is a different timeline so nothing is confirmed.”
“We can change history, Leo!” yelled Zack turning around.
“We don’t know the consequences, Zack,” said Leo. At this point Zack silently turned and faced the wall.
“He’s a friend,” said Zack.
“Indeed he is,” confessed Leo.
“Let me be!” shouted Zack.
“Make the right decision,” said Leo and silently left.
Not realizing Leo had left Zack raised his voice more than it was already, “Leave!” Upon receiving no reply, Zack correctly guessed Leo had left however knowing how inconspicuous Leo could be he, turned around and confirmed the fact that Leo had left.
“Calhoun,” called Zack.
“Ναι κύριε,” said Calhoun entering the room quickly. The pair immediately started conversing with each other in Greek with Zack apologizing that he could not help and Calhoun insisting that he doesn’t mind at all.
“Have you written the note Zack?” inquired Boris, apparently appearing out of thin air. Zack searched his eyes wondering if Leo had told them of their conversation.
“Yes,” answered Zack, showing it to him.
“Good,” said Boris reading the note. “Zack, I know how this feels.”
“Boris,” said Zack, “please do something.”
“Very well,” sighed Boris, “I will attempt to talk to Leo and Sarmad. Majority will indeed be authority.” Zack nodded and kept the note in his pocket.
An hour or so later Boris approached him. He told his assistant that the gang had agreed on a plan though Leo was hesitant to do so.
“A plan?” questioned Zack.
“Affirmative,” answered Boris.
“Like, what is it?” asked Zack.
“I warn you, you shall not like it,” warned Boris.
“Spit it out already,” barked Zack.
“So uncivil,” commented Boris feeling an urge of telling Zack a few home truths but stopped after Zack gave him a look which not even the devil could hope to imitate.
“Spit it out,” repeated Zack reaching for his revolver.
“Truth is, you’ll be the bait,” revealed Boris
“Go on,” hissed Zack.
“Since Calhoun has told us that Spartans don’t recognize him, you will be put instead of the Greek however your binds will be loose, when you are being taken to Sparta, you will fight them off and escape. Yes I know it’s risky,” said Boris. “In the meantime we will be safely at Shark’s Teeth. With an ally Calhoun has within Sparta acting as your guide you will follow us and we will probably gain a Cyber-drive from them or maybe another Time Machine through which we can return to our time by the mysterious person who claims to have come from the future.”
“But what’s the difference if it’s Calhoun who goes or me?” said Zack.
“Calhoun isn’t the brightest person around. If he makes a mistake, he might put us in danger as well,” answered Boris.
“Fair enough,” said Zack approvingly, not considering the risk.
“Go tell the trio about the plan!” ordered Boris.
“Very well,” said Zack in a grave voice.
Zack felt hesitant to talk to Leo after their previous encounter earlier. Either way he had no choice but to tell the trio the risky and dangerous plan.
Ten minutes later
Finally the time had come for the quintet to leave. Zack gave Leo a smile which he returned. Leo had understood from where Zack was coming and commended him for having the courage to put his own life in risk to save Calhoun. Once everything had been packed apart from the rubbish the quartet tied Zack loosely and gagged him though Zack insisted that it was not necessary. Zack looked quite different as the men had given him Calhoun’s clothes However Zack thought he looked rather grand than silly.
Calhoun had gratefully thanked Zack who felt quite modest and kept on reassuring him by saying that it was no problem.
“Goodbye, my dear assistant,” said Boris.
Zack simply nodded as he could not speak because of the gag.
The quartet hesitantly turned away and continued their journey to Shark’s Teeth with Sarmad and Boris feeling as if they were abandoning their good friend, the former was still friends with Zack, although he had earlier been accused of treason by him. But of course, they had sorted that problem out.
“He was a good friend,” acknowledged Sarmad.
“Are you assuming that he won’t return?” asked Leo.
“Unfortunately I do,” answered Sarmad.
“Μπορείτε να μου πείτε τι πράγμα μιλάτε?” babbled Calhoun.
“Okay does anyone know Greek?” demanded Boris. Both Leo and Sarmad shook their heads.
“Great,” added Boris.
Calhoun continued to talk in his language until he realized that they could not understand them at all, after which he just sighed and became sound.
Shark’s Teeth was a rough and dangerous mountain to climb. It seemed as if a giant was looming from above them.
“How do we climb it?” asked Sarmad.
“We don’t,” winked Boris.
“What are you up to?” said Sarmad realizing Boris had had one of his many, intelligent brainwaves.
Boris took a small sphere similar to the one in which he had kept the helicopter he had used when they were looking for an isolated place before they traveled back in time. He threw it on the ground and with a rush of light and win came out a brown helicopter used in the military.
“I know how to fly,” grinned the Professor.
“Maybe I should have been a professor,” commented Sarmad, approvingly.
The Greek was quite surprised to see an electronic bird type machine pop out of a small sphere. For a second he wondered if what his friends were doing was black magic. Then he remembered that they had come from the future and that time had probably changed. He asked Boris what it was in his language but the latter couldn’t understand it and so stepped onto the helicopter. Calhoun and Sarmad followed him.
“Isn’t this a helicopter for the military?” asked Sarmad.
“Like I said before we came here, I have my sources,” said Boris, irritatingly.
“C’mon, tell me,” begged Sarmad.
“Fine,” said Boris with a sigh. “You remember Max?”
“Your best friend?” inquired Sarmad, “The guy who came to give us a proper farewell before we came here?”
“That’s the one,” said Boris. “He works at the military and has a high ranking. I suppose you understand the rest.”
“I do,” said Sarmad before the talk became silent and Boris started up the helicopter.
Going slowly the vehicle grumbled and hissed creating a lot of noise which neither Calhoun nor Sarmad liked.
“I should’ve known Max would give me the older model. That man never ceases to amaze me,” mumbled Boris to himself. Indeed Max had given him an older model, merely to annoy Boris although the latter knew that Max was just fooling around and meant no harm.
The day goes by
The day had gone by and while Sarmad and Calhoun had had their sleep, Boris hadn’t had time to rest for even a minute. Despite of the fact that they had been going up for the entire day, they hadn’t made it to the top. Petrol was scarce, Calhoun continued to babble, and Sarmad was bored and annoyed.
“Bingo,” yelled Boris suddenly.
“Found a Bingo game?” said Sarmad, jokingly.
“I have some spare oil,” he took out a can from somewhere inside the copter.
Boris pointed at Calhoun who was puzzled, then at the oil can and then made expressions to let the Greek realize that they needed it.
Calhoun nodded his head and from the concealed, skin bag which he always carried took out a large container filled with oil.
“Nice job,” said Boris. “Now we have more than enough Petrol.
“Squawk,” chirped the Parrot and Robin together.
“I’m surprised to hear them talk,” said Sarmad, “like Leo they don’t like to talk.”
“Do I look like I care?” said Leo, with a blank expression on his face. Boris shook his head not knowing that Leo was being sarcastic while Leo gave one of his genuine grins, which had become quite regularly, at the confused professor.
“We’re at the peak, gentleman,” said Boris after a while.
Meanwhile, where Zack was residing, when the gang had left him
Poor Zack was regretting his decision of staying. He had heard a lot of things – birds chirping, a dinosaur roaring, other animals screeching but the most recent one was something that sounded suspiciously like a troop of soldiers marching towards him.
One of the soldiers looked at him and signaled someone, probably his superior as a muscular, well built man came into sight, talking in a language which not even Zack could understand.
‘Oh darn it,’ realized Zack, ‘these weren’t Spartans, they were Persians, and they even looked as if they were the latter.’
But after a moment’s thought Zack also realized that it didn’t make a difference as long as they were humans, except escaping a whole troop that is. Zack hoped that the guide that Calhoun had mentioned would still be here.
‘The liars,’ he thought savagely, ‘they faked themselves as Spartans. But why are they hunting down Calhoun?’
The leader of the troop peered into Zack’s eyes looking for any sort of fear, treachery, or plan. He stared at him for a quarter of a minute and then turned around.
‘Well now or never,’ plotted Zack. He further loosened his binds just enough so he could get free whenever he wanted.
“Argh,” he called, pretending to faint.
The leader muttered a few commands. The soldiers got their big rifles ready.
“Ten-hut,” yelled The Leader. He did some actions and turned around to give orders.
Zack quickly tore the binds, agile as always he shot three of the 5 men there quickly who promptly fell down, stone dead. The soldier left started shooting but realized that it was filled with blanks.
“What on Earth,” he cursed in the language of Persian. He quickly ducked behind a bush where his leader joined him. He turned to look at the leader who looked just as alarmed as he himself was.
The leader pointed somewhere and murmured something in Greek and the other man instantly looked at that direction, his hands raised high in an act of defense. To his surprise there was nothing there and he didn’t know what happened when a sharp blow hit the pressure point on his neck and he faded into darkness.
“Don’t worry, Zack,” said the Leader in English. “It is me, the guide Calhoun told you about.

“You know English?” asked Zack, “And me?”
“Come let us be on our way, I’ll explain during the way,” rushed The Leader. “Hopefully the Persians won’t find out about this in a hurry.
The duo rushed forward with the unexpected, new ally leading the way.
“Don’t interrupt, okay. We don’t have much time so I’m going to quickly brush through the story,” said The Leader. “Truth is there were not one but two people who came from the future. I was one of them.”
Zack looked surprised beyond words and his mouth opened and close like a goldfish’s. He looked as if he had been told that he was joining his country’s secret Science department which had been his dream since all of time.
“The other one was my brother, Neo Stilt. I am Reo Stilt,” continued Reo. “However once we came we were attacked by the savage brutes, the infamous Aryans. Our own Time Machine was damaged during the fight. Ours was not very similar to yours, but that’s a tale for another day. Thankfully we managed to fend off the Aryans and survive.”
“Fortunately Neo was smart enough to bring three additional Cyber-drives. It had taken us a long time to find three of them through which we could return back to our time but Neo and I were both happy with our new life and so decided to stay. Of course there were brutes like the Aryans but there were good people such as the people of the Indus. We lived on freshly caught fish and fruit and nuts and even dinosaur meat. To be honest it tasted quiet good, well anyhow we were falsely accused of robbing the Romans and so we both had become outlaws. We fled high to Shark’s Teeth and built a cottage over there.”
“Please do go on,” said Zack.
“Okay,” replied Reo. “But it was too hard to live there and we often starved. I often gave my share of food to Neo but for some reason he remained weak. So I had to get a job despite being an outlaw. Luckily we had lived in that Cottage for a year and so I was sun burnt, my hair had lost its nice blond color and became a dull black and our clothes had grown to rags. Still we didn’t leave this time. Because of all these changes we had I was unable to be easily distinguished. So I joined the Spartans for the Army.”
“I always visited Neo whenever I could which was often and gave him an abundance of eatables. When I realized my good Athenian friend Calhoun needed my help to guide you, I immediately checked with the Spartans to see if they were going to capture you and when I learnt that it was all a ploy, I was shocked but thankfully I kept my nerves and searched for the troop that was going to attack you. I realized how treacherous and cunning the Persians were and so I simply abducted and killed a general, took his place and came to meet you. Oh and it was me who loaded the soldiers rifles with blanks.”
“Questions later,” muttered Reo hearing a call – The call of the Persians. “Keep running.”
Having run a few miles, Zack was unable to curb his wish to stop and take a break.
“Let’s set camp,” he suggested, panting loudly.
“No time, Zack,” answered Reo, shaking his head. “Hurry, the quicker we reach Shark’s Teeth, the quicker we can repair your Time Machine.”
“Understood,” said Zack, “let’s move.”
Reo nodded his head, approving of Zack’s courage and lack of cowardice unlike most humans.
“It’s rolling time,” he said.
On the way Zack pondered over all the happenings since they had come to this time. Boris’s brother known as Mike, dying, Malince killed, and Giro fled, what with all the Persians, Spartans, Aryans and Athenians.
“Life sure is weird,” he said unknowingly, aloud.
“Oh I do beg your pardon,” said Reo.
“Tell me about Neo,” said Zack. “Nah, forget it.”
“Oh it is no problem at all, my dear Zack,” insisted Reo. “Neo was a great man, sure somewhat cunning and crafty but with a heart of gold. That was until we came here.”
“Why don’t you come back with us?” said Zack.
“Oh no, I couldn’t possibly think of annoying you that much,” said Reo, his manners exemplary.
“Oh it is no problem at all,” insisted Zack.
“Well, maybe Neo might agree to it,” considered Reo.
“Here we are,” he added, as a mountain range was visible. The mountains looked forbidding and dangerous and Zack did not wish to attempt climbing any of them.
Suddenly a familiar bang of a gunshot was heard and Reo promptly collapsed.
His body was white and frozen and a lot of blood was dripping from it. Reo’s mouth seemed to be opened, as if he were about to say something and a frown was on his forehead. The unfortunate man’s eyes were wide opened but still and unmoving. It was as if there had never been a soul in the body. So empty and hollow, those once shining eyes were.
Zack stared at the body, realizing what had just transpired. His newest friend, whom he had come to know as Reo, had just died, or in the best of cases, badly injured.
“Payback time, Zack,” sneered a voice filled with venom and hatred. It sounded somewhat familiar.
“Reo!” yelled Zack. The same voice laughed loudly and menacingly, scaring away the nearby birds. Zack flinched at the sound of his laugh. It was so heartless and filled with evil. There was no room for compassion or any emotion other than hate and anger. His voice encouraged pain and suffering, but clearly discouraged happiness and sadness.
“Now do you know how it feels to lose a comrade or friend?” said the voice.
‘That voice sounds so familiar,’ wondered Zack.
“Now you die,” the person yelled. “Just like Malince.”
“Giro!” realized Zack.
“Indeed,” answered Giro.
“Now you die,” he yelled, pulling the trigger and shooting.
Zack froze and then collapsed.
“Yes, he is dead,” said Giro to himself, as he turned around to leave, “so is the blasted friend of his. Yet I feel such a sense of emptiness. Why? Maybe it’s because the one who killed Malince is probably still alive. What was his name, again? It was Sarmad. I will not stop until Sarmad is gone as well.”
“I’m not dead yet,” said Zack in a whispery and weak voice.
“No way!” shouted Giro. Zack had a weak smirk, etching across his face.
“Even though I am dying right now, I’m not dead yet,” he said, still smirking. “The gang will be off this time in a matter of seconds. Whatever you do, you will never catch up with them. You and your dead friend, whom you call Malince, have failed.”
“Silence,” screamed Giro as he shot Zack, furiously. Giro‘s eyes were blazing. If one looked closely, he would see something that looked like a fire in those eyes of his.
“Malince!” he yelled, “Malince! I have failed you. No! Wait! Sarmad would never leave without his comrades. He is possibly still in this mud hole of a time. When I was spying on them, Zack and that Reo guy said something about the Mount of Shark’s Teeth. Now isn’t that interesting? Maybe that’s where they are. It’s a good thing I have a jet on me.”
Meanwhile with Boris and co.
Boris and his comrades had reached Shark’s Teeth peak. They saw a tiny cottage with a label on it saying, “Midnight Mountain.”
“Neo,” acknowledged the Greek.
“What is it?” said a weak, middle aged, as thin as a rake person coming out.
“Calhoun,” he added.
Πρόκειται για τους,” said Calhoun.
“Έλα μέσα,” said the man signaling the men to come in.
The cottage had no furniture, jewelry, curtains or anything. In fact the entire cottage was bare. All they had was a small sheet for a bed. A few teapots and a little bit of fruit were also there.
“Tea?” asked the man.
The quartet shook their heads.
“Come show me you’re Time Machine, weak as I am, I sure can add the Cyber-drive to the Time Machine especially if that is all that’s preventing you from leaving,” The Man said. “My name is Neo.”
“Why hello Pops,” came a malevolent voice.
Everyone turned around and were shocked to see Giro.
“I have nothing against you three,” he said to Leo, Calhoun and Boris. Unlike last time, he avoided beating around the bush and went straight to the point. “Sarmad, I challenge you to a One on One duel. I win, I get your head, and if you win, you get mine.
“Don’t do it,” insisted Boris.
“Decline a challenge?” asked Sarmad with a confident snicker “No way.”
“Pity, your friend Zack and Neo’s brother Reo were killed by me,” sneered Giro, “they would have loved to watch this.”
“You killed Zack?!” demanded Sarmad unable to control his emotions or hide his astonishment. “You’re bluffing.”
“Am I?” said Giro with a smirk. “Look into my eyes and search for a trace of a fib.”
“No way, I ain’t falling for that old trick,” said Sarmad, remembering how many times his Evil Side had tricked him with that same trick.
“You even killed Reo!?” demanded Neo as his mind finally processed the information. He fell down to his knees and put his head down so that his new friends wouldn’t see the tears streaming down his face. Reo had been the best brother one could ever ask for and now he was gone – gone thanks to this murderous, sadistic, evil, twisted, malevolent psychopath.
“Indeed,” said Giro, ignoring Neo’s cries. He took out two Broadswords and looked at them. “I’ll prefer a fair fight.” He threw one of the Broadswords at Sarmad who reflexively caught it and gazed at it, making sure that it was genuine which it was.
“Clear out,” ordered Sarmad, getting into a flawless stance.
“Let me fight him, Sarmad” said Leo, heroically.
“What, want to take the spotlight for yourself,” teased Sarmad. Then his voice turned serious. “Sorry, this one is mine.”
“Very well,” said Leo and began to walk away but then he abruptly stopped and turned to look at Sarmad in an intent manner. For a few seconds he kept staring at him but soon he shut his eyes and took out one of his fabled Sabers from his case. “You can borrow one of these.” He threw one to Sarmad who instinctively caught it. “I want it back.” The last part was said in a stern manner. “Try to cut that Broadsword with it.”
Sarmad complied and to his utter shock the Broadsword snapped in two with one strike from the Saber, which proved the latter’s sheer power and strength.
“Insane,” was all Sarmad could utter while Leo gave a smirk.
“Never take your eyes off your opponent,” he advised and Sarmad nodded.
“Thanks bro,” said Sarmad and Leo walked inside the cottage.
Sarmad gave a mean look to Giro who barely flinched. Smirks etching on both of their faces, Sarmad and Giro walked in circles, waiting for the other opponent to strike first while Boris, Calhoun, Neo and Leo looked on in suspense.
Simultaneously both Sarmad and Giro gave a battle cry that was more animalistic and human and jumped to the centre and clashed their swords against each other. Sarmad attempted to strike low, Giro defended it, the latter struck high and Sarmad defended it.
The quartet from outside peered through the window not wanting to miss a single blow.
Clash!
The two swords struck each other. They were equal. When one struck the other defended when one defended the other struck. They both had equal stamina, attack and defense.
“Darn,” yelled Sarmad.
“Yield,” yelled Giro.
Suddenly Sarmad gave a strike so powerful that Giro’s Broadsword flew a few meters away from all of the action while Giro clutched his hand in pain, however he quickly recovered and before Sarmad could capitalize, he gave him a jab to the stomach and then attempted a quick roundhouse kick to the chin but Sarmad managed to dodge it and jumped back where it was safe and tried to calm himself.
Giro calmly walked towards his fallen sword and picked it up while Sarmad recovered.
“Not bad Sarmad, not bad,” said Giro and mockingly clapped. “Now you die!” Giro raced forward with killer intent and tried to strike Sarmad with his sword who managed to bring his sword up at the last possible second and gave a strike of his own.
Clang!
The swords clashed together and were even until Sarmad punched Giro with one arm and with the other struck his foe’s sword which fell down causing Giro to became unarmed once again.
Before Giro could reach his sword or attempt any type of trickery Sarmad’s Saber was right next to his chest and any sudden movement would involve him getting stabbed in the stomach which he surely didn’t want.
“Yield,” said Sarmad, darkly.
“Never,” shouted Giro, attempting to punch Sarmad however before he could Sarmad instinctively stabbed Giro through the stomach.
Giro collapsed, frozen – as pale as a ghost.
The party outside remained motionless, not knowing what had just transpired.
“He deserved what was coming,” said Sarmad, showing no remorse whatsoever. “But no matter what Zack ain’t coming back. Darn.” This unforgiving attitude was undoubtedly influenced by the remains of his Evil Side.
Remaining motionless, the party suddenly realized what had transpired. Sarmad had beaten Giro. They all jumped with joy and ran out of the cottage.
“I should have killed him back when I had killed Malince,” said Sarmad, regretful of sparing Giro earlier when he had finished Malince. “While Malince had committed crime even if along with him, Giro had a personal vendetta against me. I thought that he could’ve changed but he had no interest to do so. It’s my fault that Zack is dead. Zack, wherever you are, I hope that you have forgiven me even though I haven’t forgiven myself.”
“He may be a bad person,” said Leo, referring to Giro, “but he was an honorable fighter. He chose to have a fair fight, while he could’ve easily killed us all with his weapons. Let’s give him a proper burial.”
A while later, a particular group of five were making a grave for the person who had tried to kill them all.
“Say do you know what route Zack and Reo were taking?” asked Sarmad, once they had finished burying the man known as Giro.
“Yes, but why?” said Neo.
“If the monster of a Giro can get a grave, then so can Zack and Reo,” answered Sarmad. Neo’s eyes widened.
“Surely, you aren’t going to try and search for their bodies?” he asked, flabbergasted.
“Of course we are,” said Boris, once he noticed the conversation.
“But there is a very low chance of you finding them,” said Neo although secretly he was hoping that they would go and find his brother’s body. It would at least be better than a scenario in which the Persians find them. Neo shivered as he thought about it.
“So?” said Boris, absentmindedly. Neo felt annoyed. Why couldn’t Boris ever take anything seriously? He knew that it wasn’t his fault but it was still very frustrating.
“Never mind,” he muttered, taking a deep breath to calm himself. Boris was confused. Instead of saying anything, he simply shrugged.
“Whatever you say,” he said.
“Then it’s decided. We shall go and look for their bodies’ tomorrow morning,” declared Sarmad.
Neo put his head down in defeat. He knew that he could not win this argument. When Sarmad had made up his mind, nothing could make him change it.
The robin was playfully wrestling the parrot that held a worm in its beak. The parrot swallowed the worm before the other bird could reach it. Sarmad whistled and the robin forgot about the worm and was instantly besides Sarmad.
Sarmad playfully told it to go find Reo and Zack but to his surprise, the intelligent bird nodded as if it understood everything. It rubbed its head gently against Sarmad’s hand and he caressed it with the same hand. He grinned at the intelligence of his bird.
He would remember this to annoy Leo by saying that his bird was much more obedient than the parrot that was looking for some fruit which it could not find.
Putting its head down in shame it slowly walked its way to Leo who smiled, kindly at it. The parrot sniffed and went behind Leo, only to find him hiding a guava behind him.
“Your too smart for your own good,” said Leo as the parrot snatched the guava from Leo’s hand.
“Hey why don’t you name that parrot?” suggested Sarmad. “I named mine Juck.”
“And what should I name mine?” inquired Leo.
“I don’t know,” Sarmad frowned thinking of a name, “Why not something like Jaguar?” Sarmad didn’t expect Leo to worship the name but he was still surprised when Leo grabbed him from his collar and gave him a furious look.
“Never mention that name to me again,” he said, his voice as low and cold as it was in the old days, before they had formed a bond. “Got it?” Once he got a nod, Leo dropped him and with one last angry glance, walked away.
“What’s eating him up?” said Sarmad to no one in particular, once Leo was out of hearing range, “I guess he has something against Jaguars.”
He noticed Zack coming from a clump of trees nearby with an abundance of firewood. Boris was consulting Neo about the circumstances that caused him to come to this time. He overheard some of the conversation.
“Well you see, I’m not from your timeline,” explained Neo, pausing to let the information sink in, “I’m from another timeline in the extreme future. You see I live in land in the west of the largest ocean of the world which we call the Coventina Ocean. I don’t know what they call it in your timeline – Pacific, was it?”
“Indeed,” said Boris.
“We call that land Howland. You call it Asia I believe. Well Howland has a variety of volcanoes and I lived near the largest one of them all, called Volkan. You see I had created a tool that would create a rip in the fabric of time and space so that a person could travel from one side of the world to the other side instantly.”
“One day Volkan erupted without anyone predicting it. My brother and I had no chance of survival as the lava closed in on us. We were so desperate that we were forced to punch a button in the tool that had not been experimented and hope for the best. However instead of traveling through space, we traveled through time. By the way, I forgot to tell you that our Space Traveling Machine which later became a Time Machine also used a Cyber-Drive but in our time Cyber-Drives are in abundance so we brought an additional three. We enjoyed our life here and so we decided to begin new lives. What a thriller of a story right, Boris? Oh dear how I’ve ranted,” said Neo. He looked at Boris once he was finished reminiscing the old times only to see him fast asleep.
Neo’s first thought was to be angry but for some reason he could not bring himself to do so.
Sarmad himself had fallen asleep as he had listened to Neo’s tale. Neo beckoned Zack and the two together managed to drag the twosome back inside the cottage.
Hence the quartet decided to spend the night in the cottage. However they decided not to deprive Neo of his little sheet or what he called bed. But Reo had revealed that he had an extra sheet and any one person could sleep on it. Sarmad slept in Reo’s sheet and the others slept on the floor. After being urged to wake up by his allies to wake up, Sarmad had won a small toss they had done to decide who would get his bed. Once the toss was over Sarmad fell into a deep sleep on Reo’s sheet of cloth.
By the time Sarmad had woken, everyone was already up and ready. The Time Machine had been repaired before even Leo who was the first one to wake up had woken up.
“Oh well, let’s go find Zack and your brother Neo,” Sarmad announced cheerfully.
“Guys,” began Neo, “I can’t thank you enough for your help. It really is a pleasure to join you and have met you.”
“Oh it’s alright, nothing really,” said Boris modestly. Sarmad nodded and Leo grunted.
“Thanks a lot guys,” said Neo again.
“Let’s get going,” said Sarmad. The others nodded and they grinned to each other.
Leo was smiling and rejoicing at the fact that he had such good friends. Everything was calm and happy and he had learnt to move on from his horrifying past and from where he was now, it seemed as if his past was nothing more than a dream that he had had. Then something that truly frightened Leo happened and he froze with pure shock and turned white.
A twisted cackle was heard.
A cackle that Leo knew all too well. A cackle that he had prepared for for years but it was still shocking that he would hear it here, of all places.
“Well boy,” came a malevolent voice. “We meet again. Why do you look so surprised? I had already told you that I would extract my revenge from you. Surely you haven’t forgotten me?”
“What the heck are you doing here, Jupiter?!” shouted Leo with an unrestrained fury.
Aren’t you happy to see me?” said Jupiter in mock sadness. “I’m just here to deliver these things to you.” The twisted man looked just as he did all those years ago and it seemed that he hadn’t aged a single day – The same white hair and the same sadistic looking eyes.
He snapped his fingers and a man wearing the symbol of 8th Solar stepped forward and, with great difficulty, seemed to be dragging three bodies towards Jupiter. All three of them were tied up and gagged but one of the bodies seemed to be conscious and was clearly struggling but the other two weren’t doing so. Thus they were either unconscious or dead.
Everyone’s eyes widened when they saw that one of the bodies was none other than Zack – And his body was of one of the unconscious men.
“Before you ask,” Jupiter laughed an evil laugh, “your friend Zack is indeed dead. But don’t worry, I didn’t do anything to him. It was Giro who killed him and he contacted me to tell me about the current situation. You see I’ve been keeping tabs on you ever since you arrived in this Time. I’ve been watching your every move from the distance – waiting for the right moment to crush you. Not physically, but mentally just like I did all those years ago. I waited for one of you to die so that I could use his body as leverage over you in case my master plan failed.”
“Master plan?” said Leo. Jupiter ignored him and instead looked as the other unconscious body came into view of his enemies.
This time it was Neo whose eyes bulged so much that they almost looked like large footballs. For the other body was of nobody other than his brother Reo.
“Again, it was Giro who murdered your brother, Neo,” said Jupiter with one of his signature cackles. “I’m just here to deliver them.” He turned to gaze at Leo again. “This next body will be of special interest to you, boy.”
Indeed Jupiter was correct when he said that Leo would be interested in the next body which was actually alive and literally kicking.
It was of a man of Leo’s age with fire red eyes that were not found on many people and blazing red hair. His clothes were in rags and were completely torn and tattered.
But something about him seemed familiar to Leo. For the first few seconds Leo was oblivious to who this man was but it soon hit him.
It was Jaguar!
The boy who had befriended him all those years ago but had later betrayed him when Jupiter came to kidnap them. Leo’s face furrowed into a frown.
“You think that you can use that person to barter with me?!” said Leo. Though initially surprised Leo broke into amused laughter which sounded quite odd considering the fact that he rarely if ever laughed. “Don’t you know that I hate Jaguar.” His voice grew serious. “That man betrayed me. You shot him and I sacrificed myself to save him and how did he repay me? He ran away while I suffered in agony.”
Sarmad was shocked. He and his friends had been silent, knowing that Leo and this man had personal problems. Was this what his Evil Side had referred to when he had been injured.
*Flashback*
“You are so pathetic Sarmad. Was it not your fear of losing your life that overtook you when you saw your best friend being robbed while you just stood there and did nothing but watch?”
“I was but a child. What could I have done?” asked Sarmad.
“What could you have done? Go ask Leo that,” said Sarmad’s Evil Side, knowingly.
“What’s that supposed to mean?” demanded Sarmad.
“Ah, so Leo hasn’t told you anything. Could it be that he doesn’t trust you? Could it be that he thinks of you as nothing but a tool to get whatever he wishes?”
*End Flashback*
It was possible that this was what his Evil Side was referring to and he was also shocked at the fact that Leo had such a terrible life while he himself used to feel sorry for himself so often.
Sarmad was brought out of his thoughts when Jupiter gave a chortle.
“Very well,” he said acting as if he was Leo’s friend. “Since I shall now kill him just for my amusement I might as well grant Jaguar’s dying wish which I’m sure is… Talking to you.” He opened the gag of the struggling Jaguar in a rough and painful manner while his captive breathed heavily and quickly spoke to Leo before Jupiter could put the gag back on.
“Leo, I know that you’re still angry at me and you have every right to be,” said Jaguar very quickly, “but I’m really sorry for all that I’ve done to you – All the torture I put you through and all of the pain – both physical and mental. But remember I made a mistake which everybody does.” Leo’s eyes widened as his mind quickly processed all that he was hearing. “Think of all the fun we had – The football matches, the baseball matches and heck, even the video games we played.”
“I put you through hell and I truly regret that and I’m not asking you to save my life,” continued Jaguar. Leo was even more shocked – Jaguar had always been afraid of death. “I fully deserve to die. All I’m asking is for your forgiveness. I beg you Leo, please forgive me and all of the sins that I have made.”
Jaguar took a deep breath and went silent, having completed his speech. Knowing this, Jupiter roughly put the gag back on and secretly hoped that this would be enough to convince Leo to make up with the other boy so that Jupiter could easily barter with him.
“Well, boy,” chortled Jupiter. “Don’t you want to trade Jaguar’s life for your freedom, now?”
A long and dismissive silence overtook the gang with Leo intently staring at his shoes which seemed very interesting as of then and Jupiter smirking as well as gazing at his enemy.
“I don’t care about Jaguar,” said Leo at last. “Do as you wish with him. I don’t forgive him.”
“As you wish boy. I shall kill him,” snickered Jupiter, hiding his surprise and disappointment.
“Wait,” said Leo. Jupiter’s eyebrow went up, as did his hope. “Allow me to kill him. I owe him at least that much.”
Jupiter was further disappointed however he once again didn’t show it. The sadistic maniac’s mind was racing. If the first boy killed the second one, then the second one will feel even more pain than if he Jupiter would kill him. His mind – both mental and physical – would be crushed.
“Of course boy,” said Jupiter.
Leo took his gun out and aimed it at his tied up former friend who, instead of struggling, simply bowed his head in dismay – Not at being killed, but being killed by his best friend.
Leo was about to shoot him when he heard something – A familiar voice which Leo instantly remembered. How could he forget such a voice?
The voice of his late father.
“Leo, I told you that he was going to tempt you with evil and this is what I meant. He is trying to make you a murderer because while Hades was pure evil, Jaguar doesn’t have an ounce of evil in his heart. Don’t lose sight of what’s right, Leo my son.” Once the voice had said that, he was gone – He had faith that Leo would make the correct decision.
Leo remained silent for a few minutes and he slowly put his hand and gun down and stared at the ground which seemed more beautiful than it really was. He looked at it mainly to hide how guilty he felt and even though he was usually a master at hiding emotions, he couldn’t this time. His father was right – he had become what he hated and he regretted that he hadn’t even shown the slightest amount of reluctance or hesitance at shooting his old friend, Jaguar.
“Allow him to speak one more time,” ordered Leo at last, referring to Jaguar. He had noticed that it seemed that nobody could hear the voice and Leo didn’t want to make a fool of himself by talking about a voice that nobody could hear.
While Jupiter was all too happy to let Leo listen to Jaguar one more time, he wanted to have some fun with Leo again, and that’s what he did.
“But he’s already had a chance, so I don’t think he deserves another,” said Jupiter.
“Don’t tempt me, freak,” said Leo in a calm voice however anyone see how deathly low his voice was.
“Whatever you say,” replied Jupiter, still acting as if he were Leo’s friend. He removed the gag in a painful manner and Jaguar quickly caught his breath.
“I’ve nothing to say,” said he, shaking his head in a mournful way, “except that I truly am sorry. I don’t mind dying because I know that I truly deserve it.”
Jaguar closed his eyes to stop the tears from pouring out, however it only sped the process and soon his face was wet with salty tears.
“I’m sorry, kill me if you wish but please forgive me,” croaked Jaguar through his tears.
Neo, Sarmad and even Boris found themselves touched by Jaguar’s plea and were slightly upset at Leo for not showing any emotion even when his former friend was in such a state.
Little did they know, Leo was also deeply touched by Jaguar’s words however he still found it hard to try to forgive him, especially since Jupiter was so close and he constantly reminded him of the pain Leo had felt on that fateful day when Jaguar left him while he was writhing in agony. Leo was still scarred by the events of that day – He still remembered how much that bullet hurt when it dug through his skin and caused such pain that would make so much seem harmless – And it was worse because he had also been hurt by the mental trauma that that cowardly act of Jaguar had inflicted. Thus the pain he felt was too much for him to forget, in fact the pain was so much that he couldn’t sleep for days on and he had to be giving a sleeping pill so that his body could recover.
“I beg you Leo. Kill me if you wish but please forgive me,” said Jaguar and then went quiet and he waited for Jupiter’s gag to come over him but it never came. He looked up to see Jupiter smirking at Leo, almost daring him to come forward and take Jaguar however Leo never came. He just remained there and seemed deep in thought which was really not a surprise.
Silence overtook them once again.
Sarmad, Boris, Neo and Calhoun stared at Leo, waiting for his decision. To their surprise, Jupiter also gazed at Leo while Jaguar stared at the ground in a mournful way. Nothing could be heard – It seemed that even the birds, dinosaurs and even Mother Nature herself knew of the importance these few moments held and thus stayed quiet and solemn. Sarmad, Boris, Neo and even Calhoun, who could feel the tension in the air, were holding back tears although at least one drop had been released by each of them. They stared at Leo in suspense.
A single, silver tear was let out by his eyes and seeped down his face onto the previously dry ground.
Sarmad in particular gazed at Leo. He and Boris had decided that even if Leo would make the wrong decision, they would step in to defend Jaguar because they had noticed the sincerity and genuine sadness in the words Jaguar had uttered. But for Sarmad, this also held importance because he had a feeling that if Leo would try to kill his former friend, he would never be able to forgive him, although now that Sarmad had seen that one drop of water fall from Leo’s eyes he was sure that he would make the correct decision.
“So boy,” said Jupiter disrupting the silence, “what is your decision?”
Sarmad, Boris, Neo and even Calhoun, who could feel the tension in the air, were holding back tears although at least one drop had been released by each of them.
“Free him,” said Leo at last. “Free him and I’ll do whatever you wish. Jaguar I forgive you.”
“Leo,” began Jaguar, before Jupiter could say anything, “I only ask you to forgive me. Don’t give your life away to save my useless one. Jupiter will no doubt take your life in exchange for mine and I don’t want you to lose yours.”
“Don’t worry Jaguar,” said Leo in a calm voice, but instead of the usual coldness that laced it, this time his voice held no such thing – in fact, it was a tone that friends give each other – stern but gentle.
“Fantastic decision,” cackled Jupiter. He snapped his fingers and a man wearing the 8th Solar mark instantly came to him and saluted. Jupiter then said to him, “You, go tie up the boy but do it against a tree so that his limbs are clearly visible and he’s standing.”
Then he looked at Leo, “Don’t resist boy.” Then he gazed at Leo’s friends who had gotten into their respective stances. “Don’t interfere. I don’t need to tell you the consequences for that.” He took out a revolver and rubbed it’s metal covering in a rather fond way. After that he snapped his fingers again and another man wearing the 8th Solar symbol and gave a salute and Jupiter said to him, “Release this boy.” He pointed at Jaguar.
Each of the men complied. The first man tied up Leo against a tree who didn’t even attempt to resist while his friends hesitantly stepped back and put their guns back in their holsters while the other member of 8th Solar released Jaguar just as they had said.
“Now then,” said Jupiter, snapping his fingers once again. Another man wearing the 8th Solar ensign stepped forward in a matter of short seconds. “You, bring the Time Contactor!” The man looked slightly shocked but his face quickly regained its neutral expression.
“Yes sir,” said the man.
“What’s the Time Contactor?” asked Boris, speaking for the first time in some time. He was naturally interested in anything to do with Science.
Jupiter smirked, “Something that our top scientists made with great difficulty although those boneheads did have your blueprints to go by. Allow me to explain, it is a miniature machine the size of a plate in which people from different times can contact each other. And yes it does have a small shard of Cyber-drive which we stole from you.”
“I thought that the Cyber-drive was smaller one day,” mumbled Boris to himself.
In a few, short minutes the man had returned and was carrying something that looked a lot like a slim disk.
“Here sire,” he said to Jupiter and handed him the disk.
“You were too slow,” commented Jupiter. The man’s face paled. “And for that, you must pay the ultimate price.” Within moments the sadistic man had shot the other person in the face while everybody stared at him with disgust and contempt.
“What kind of person kills his own men?!” said Sarmad flabbergasted.
“One who has such a twisted mind such as the one Jupiter has,” said Jaguar, speaking to Sarmad for the first time. “He kills for his own amusement.”
“Now then,” said Jupiter, ignoring the looks he was getting from his enemies. He pressed a button on the Time Contactor and waited for a few seconds before a three-dimensional image of a man came into view in a hologram type of view.
“Yes, what is it Jupiter?” he asked.
“Hello to you too Mercury,” said Jupiter sarcastically.
“Humph,” grunted Mercury in an unpleasant way.
“Anyway,” continued Jupiter, “I’ve freed the one called Jaguar, and I’ve got Leo with me. So since you provided the resources for me to do my task, I shall have to pay my debt.”
“Indeed,” said Mercury, “I expect to see the photographs of at least one hundred different species of dinosaurs on my desk, the moment you get here.”
“Right, right,” confirmed Jupiter. “I have all the pictures you need and once I’ve dealt with Leo and his companions I shall use the Time Machine of the one called Neo to return back to my own time. Over.”
“Over,” said Mercury as the transmission was cut.
“Well then, boy,” said Jupiter emphasizing on the word ‘boy.’ “Let’s get your punishment started.” He snapped his fingers again and within seconds almost a hundred men came into view. It seemed as if they came out of thin air. “For your friends’ sake, I hope they stay out of this. I doubt these men would take kindly to them.” Jupiter gave a most malicious, abhorrent, disdainful and downright evil cackle and raised one of his arms which held a revolver.
Bang!
He shot the gun at Leo’s right arm who would have clutched it in pain had he been able to. The pain was similar to the agony he had suffered at the hands of this very same man all those years ago, although this was slightly better as he knew that his friends were safe.
“You,” said Jupiter to one of his men, “Go patch up that wound, but just try to stop the bleeding. I don’t want him to die until his debts have been paid.” The man quickly walked to Leo and covered the wound with a rag.
Meanwhile Sarmad and Jaguar were having their own struggle.
“C’mon we’ve got to save Leo,” said Sarmad and would have run towards Leo, had Neo not restrained him.
“He’s right,” said Jaguar, kicking Calhoun who was restraining him.
“Guys,” said Boris mournfully. “I want to save Leo as much as you do and it’s not fear of those men that’s holding me back. No, look at Leo closely. He is delivering a silent message to us that we stay here.”
“So we just stand here and watch him die?!” shouted Jaguar.
“I… don’t know,” confessed Boris. “Don’t let him go Neo and tell Calhoun to do the same.” Neo complied and said the same thing to his Greek friend. “I’m sorry Leo.”
Bang!
Jupiter shot at Leo’s other arm who once again screamed in pain and would’ve clutched his arm is he had been able to, but alas that were not to be.
“Cover that wound as well,” commanded Jupiter to the man who had put the rag over Leo’s previous wound. The man complied but made sure not to do anything that would ease the pain. In fact he put the rag on rather roughly which caused Leo to feel even more pain while Jupiter nodded approvingly.
“So boy,” he said, “What do you think about my shooting?”
Leo struggled to look up and then unexpectedly gave a smirk, “I’ve seen children who shoot better.” Leo’s allies looked on in surprise and horror.
“Does he have a death wish?” said Neo.
“Darn it, let me go. Leo needs my help,” thrashed Jaguar while Sarmad said similar things.
“Leo…” was all Boris could utter. He wanted to help Leo so badly, but the latter had given him a signal not to interfere no matter what happened and to keep the others in line as well.
Bang!
This time Jupiter shot at Leo’s right foot and once again Leo roared in agony while the same man who had put the rags on his arms put another cloth on his right foot to slow the bleeding but just like last time, he did it roughly and in a way that would cause Leo more pain.
“So boy,” said Jupiter in a mocking tone, “how does it feel?”
“Like a child is tickling me,” answered Leo with a weak smirk. “Know this, Jupiter – you can destroy this body, but you’ll never destroy who or what I am. Even if you kill me, somebody else will rise up to destroy me. If I die, my friends will have no qualms of shooting you.”
Sarmad and Boris were shocked beyond words and their mouths hung open in a comical way. For the first time ever, Leo had actually admitted that he was their friends. Of course, Jaguar and Neo weren’t as shocked as they didn’t know about how Leo had never confessed the fact that he does consider them friends and Calhoun didn’t even understand what they were saying although he could tell that something important was going on.
“Ah yes,” said Jupiter. Instead of a furious expression like Leo had expected, he wore a victorious and evil one that betrayed the fact that he had already declared himself the victor of this war, “your friends. Have you forgotten about the people behind me. I doubt that they’d take too kindly to their interferences.” With that, Jupiter gave one of his trademark cackles and raised his revolver once again.
Bang!
The vindictive man had shot Leo’s other foot and once again Leo yelled in the pain. It hurt so much that he didn’t even know how to deal with it.
“You may put the rag on the wound,” said Jupiter to the man who had previously put the cloths on Leo’s wounds, which he did.
“Now boy,” said Jupiter, smiling evilly. “You… will… die.” He paused between each of the words in a taunting and scornful way.
“No!” shouted both Sarmad and Jaguar, simultaneously, violently struggling, while Boris and Neo put their heads down sadly. Leo had made this decision himself although they didn’t know how they could possibly avenge him if he died.
Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang!
Jupiter had shot four bullets at Leo’s heart. However he was genuinely shocked to see what had happened. In fact, everybody was astonished at what had transpired.
Somehow, Jaguar had struggled his way out of his captor’s grip and had defended Leo from the bullets, reminiscent of the time when Leo had done the same thing for Jaguar.
For a few minutes Jaguar idly stood still, obviously in pain. Then he slowly, but roughly collapsed and landed with a loud thud on the ground, right before Leo’s surprised eyes.
Jaguar was a mess. His chest was bleeding profusely and it seemed that the bullets missed his vital organs by a few centimeters. His face was as pale as sheet and it seemed to be frozen in fear.
“I’m s-s-sorry, Leo,” whispered Jaguar, before his pupils lost the light that they held and his body stopped moving completely and permanently. His eyes were hollow and seemed as if they never held a spirit in them. But for some reason, despite of all the negative things, his cheeks were stretched into something unexpected – something that nobody expected to see there.
Something that looked suspiciously like a smile.
Jupiter gazed at that smile. A smile usually meant that that person had died in peace and it infuriated him to know that Jaguar had had such a death. He would not let Leo die a similar death.
“Jaguar,” was all Leo could utter, his voice barely above a whisper. Jaguar was the first person whom Leo was angered beyond what words could reach and he was also the first person who taught Leo the art of forgiving and forgetting.
But most important of all – He had taught Leo what it meant to have a friend.
‘Jaguar,’ he thought, ‘you cherished life and feared for it to end. But yet, you overcame that fear and all you genuinely wanted was my forgiveness… I let you die. No more! No more! No more will I allow such good people to die on my watch. It is time that I rid the world of the menace known as Jupiter!’
While Leo was making his resolve to avenge Jaguar, the others were making a plan to free Leo, and defeat Jupiter, once and for all.
“Neo, tell Calhoun to pass me a spear,” ordered Sarmad in a quick and urgent tone. He had been released by Calhoun and Neo when Jaguar had freed himself. He needed to release Leo if they were to have a chance in beating Jupiter and his troops.
“Περάσει ένα δόρυ,” said Neo to Calhoun who obliged and passed Sarmad one of his many spears.
“Everyone,” began Sarmad in an authoritative and commanding manner. His face was grim, solemn and somber, “Take out your guns and get ready for a fight. I’m going to go free Leo and cut his binds with this spear. Boris you stay back and shoot the men and I’ll soon join you. Calhoun, you go fight with your spear upfront and take out as many of those men as you possibly can. We’ve fought the people of 8th Solar before and we know that while they have quantity, we have quality.”
Boris nodded his approval and once Neo had translated the plan, Calhoun did so as well.
“Neo,” continued Sarmad, “Do you know of any nearby tribes or cities who may help us in this fight?”
“Well,” said Neo, “Come to think of it, there is a large city conquered by the Muslims a few miles below the base of Shark’s Teeth. Also there are some Athenian towns about ten miles away from the base of Shark’s Teeth but they don’t like to fight in wars unless they are against the Spartans. But I myself am on good terms with the Muslim King and I’m sure that he’d help us if I tell him our situation.”
“Then while I free Leo and Boris and Calhoun fight, you go there and try to get as many troops as possible from them – A hundred and fifty troops should be enough to help us in our predicament,” said Sarmad.
“But how do I reach the bottom of Shark’s Teeth, let alone travel a few miles on foot?” protested Neo.
“I can help with that,” spoke up Boris when Sarmad failed to reply. “Here,” he gave Neo three spheres which looked a lot like the one in which his helicopter resided. “Each of them hold a large and spacey helicopter which should be able to hold at least fifty people and go in triple the speed of the helicopter that we came to Shark’s Teeth on.” Boris then went on in a long string of Scientific talk, which made no sense to Sarmad, although Neo understood that Boris was giving him instructions on how to pilot the helicopters and intently listened.
“Do you understand?!” demanded Boris finally.
“Yes,” confirmed Neo.
“Now go and get our army,” said Sarmad. “And good luck.” Neo smiled, despite the situation, at how much Sarmad sounded like an army officer who’s giving orders. He quickly started one of the helicopters and with a farewell, flew away to search for the Muslims. “Boris, Calhoun, get to work. I’ll go free Leo.”
“You’re too slow,” came a voice. Everybody turned around to see a broken and battered Leo and were shocked to see his eyes – they were previously cold and cool and while they still held those expressions they held something else – the desire to avenge Jaguar and sheer determination to prove that his friend’s death was not in vain.
“Leo!” Everybody was astonished.
“In the flesh,” said Leo with a grim and solemn smile.
“How’d you get out?” asked Sarmad, incredulous. Leo didn’t reply but instead he gestured towards his Sabers that were still attached to his back and Sarmad nodded, understanding.
“I see. You can join Calhoun upfront in that case. Myself and Boris will do the shooting and you and Calhoun can do the hand-to-hand combat.” Leo simply nodded at Sarmad’s order.
“Is everybody ready for this fight? Know this,” said Boris, “we may not survive this fight.”
“I’m in,” was the reply both Sarmad and Leo uttered.
“But,” continued Boris, “Leo’s injured. Look at his arms and legs – he’s practically decapitated.”
“I don’t give darn if I’m dying,” chimed in Leo in a serious tone. “I’m still going to fight, even if it kills me to do so.” His face furrowed into a determined and slightly somber look – the same one he always got when he was going to have a fight.
Boris and Sarmad nodded and they all looked at their enemies disdainfully and noticed that they too, were making a plan with Jupiter screaming out orders and the men looking too frightened to say anything against the man’s wishes even if they wanted to.
“Y-yes sir,” they all stuttered.
“Good,” growled Jupiter. “Now begin!”
With many battle cries, everyone raised their weapon to the sky and the sword fighters ran towards their opponents, while the many gunmen looked for a safe place they could shoot for. Most of 8th Solar’s men were sword fighters with only a couple of them having guns. And only two of Sarmad’s team was a swordsman and the rest were gunmen. Among the sword fighters were both Leo and Jupiter who barged through their competition with ease, although the former was injured and the latter was rather old.
Most of the swordsmen ganged up on Leo however to their alarm, the man was not in the least fazed and walked as if it were just a walk in the park.
Slash! Leo had just killed another of his enemies with one swift and powerful sweep with his twin Sabers. One of his eyes quickly went on Sarmad and he was pleased to see that he was taking out his competition.
‘8th Solar men aren’t very intelligent,” Leo mused to himself as he noticed that none of them were attacking Sarmad and the others. A strike at his foreside brought him out of his musing and he flinched in pain and for a split second, his defenses were down.
One of his foes reached out to attack him and while he noticed, Leo didn’t nearly have enough time to block. Before the blow could connect it had been blocked by somebody else and Leo was pleasantly shocked to see who it was.
Calhoun! Leo had almost forgotten that the Greek was also in the fight. His spear was slightly inferior to the more sharp and modern swords, but he managed to hold his own against the 8th Solar men, who as Leo had thought earlier, were mediocre swordsmen.
Calhoun gave Leo a smile which was returned by a grateful nod. The latter learnt that his wound wasn’t too bad and that he would be able to fight without a problem. Knowing this and having no reason to continue standing idly, he got into a deadly, flawless and perfect stance and stood back-to-back against Calhoun.
Then, without missing a beat of his heart, he braced himself as a number of his enemies rushed towards them in a swift but an amateurish and sloppy way and Leo could’ve laughed however he managed to hold it in. He noticed that one of his twin Sabers had a small amount of rust at the tip of it and he frowned to himself. He’d have to take care of the corrosion later.
A punch to his chest brought him out of his thoughts and he cursed himself in anger. He knew that to be an excellent fighter, he should clear his mind at all times, but trying to keep his hatred at the back of his mind, to prevent it from consuming him was pretty difficult.
He needed to make sure that he wouldn’t be consumed by it, he had to distract himself from his anger at Jupiter but if he cleared his mind and thought of nothing then eventually his thoughts would wander to Jupiter and that would be horrendous so he had to occupy himself as dangerous as that was.
Leo countered the blow with a stab from his sword, effectively killing the man who had punched him and the man was stunned before the former put his Saber through the latter’s stomach. He smirked to himself – between him and Calhoun, they were able to kill at least thirty out of the fifty men there and they were still ready for more.
His eyes flickered from one man to another and finally rested on his most hated enemy – Jupiter. Leo had instructed his companions prior to the battle to allow him to take care of that psychopath.
Jupiter gazed at the man and narrowed his eyes in anger, however he made it look as if he were doing so out of concern instead of spite.
“Are you okay, boy?” he asked pretending to be friendly. While his voice feigned friendliness, it also betrayed hints of insanity buried deep inside.
“Go to hell, Jupiter!” screamed Leo, forgetting about his resolve to stay stable and not to give in to his anger. “You-you killed Jaguar!”
“Such language,” said Jupiter, shaking his head in mock disapproval. “I never did understand why people use such colorful language.”
“Maybe you will, when your face is under my boot, you damned freakish dog” sneered Leo.
“Ah, you must be educated,” said Jupiter returning Leo’s smirk with a mocking smile. “It’s not that I dislike you, or anything, it’s just that people like you need to be taught how to grovel at superior people’s feet.” He said the last part with contempt, dropping all pretense of amiability.
That was the all that needed to be said as Leo raced forward with his swords, without a proper stance or strategy; his hatred having seemingly blinded him of reason.
“Fool!” said Jupiter, noticing that Leo’s wounds were slowing him down and were contributing in making his movement sloppy and inadequate. “You cannot beat me.” He dodged the first few of his opponent’s moves without even using his sword to block since Leo was fighting without any proper pattern or stratagem.
Then he raised his sword to block his attacks and gave a considerable blow to Leo’s face which he fortunately managed to block. However the attack managed to force Leo to stagger back a bit which Jupiter instantly took advantage of and he did something that finished the battle – He hit Leo with the hilt of the blade, stunning him and then he delivered a bone-crushing roundhouse kick that sent Leo staggering back in obvious pain and agony.
“You lose,” he said darkly, his sword mere centimeters away from Leo’s neck.
Leo was shocked – Utterly surprised at this turn of events . That kick had hurt so much more than it was supposed to and now he was at the mercy of Jupiter. He slowly raised his hands and then…
…Started to clap?
“Well done, Jupiter,” he grinned. He was the one feigning a different expression than what he felt this time, “You have beaten me in this battle. However this war is mine to win as I already have.”
“And what makes you say that?” asked Jupiter, curiously and returning the mocking politeness. He gave a little laugh which soon evolved into his unmistakable and very familiar cackles full of madness and insanity. “You fool! Do you really think that I shall lose to pathetic filth like you? I am unbeatable – I am invincible. I am simply above you.”
“Look around you,” croaked Leo. “Your army is dead and you shall join them.”
Jupiter looked around and was shocked to see that Leo was saying the truth – His entire army of a hundred men was dead – all gunned down by Sarmad and his cronies. He gazed at his fallen men – of course he couldn’t care less about those imbeciles but the problem was that that was his army. He cursed with very colorful language under his breath. But before he lost it, he began to calm down and wondered why he had been so worried at all.
“Well, boy,” said the sadistic and fiendish man. “I admit that you have surprised me with this predicament, however to your misfortune, it is nothing that I cannot handle, and do you want to know why?”
“Why?” inquired Leo from the ground, speaking through his blood.
Jupiter brought his mouth right next to Leo’s right ear and began to whisper in a creepy and psychopathic manner, but before he could even begin, a loud shout was heard and everybody looked up and to Jupiter’s dismay and Leo’s, Sarmad’s, Calhoun’s and Boris’s delight, three familiar helicopters began their descent and they all could see it filled with mostly Arabic people, although there were some other nationalities as well such as Australian and even a few British.
“Ah, that must be the backup you call for,” commented Jupiter. He noticed Leo’s surprised look at his statement and gave an over-dramatic sigh, “You didn’t think that I didn’t hear you, did you? Of course I did.”
He gave a malicious cackle and continued, “As I was saying, you see this army is actually about a tenth of what my actual army is. In fact, it is even less than that. I have a thousand more men left and they should be arriving in…” he looked at his wristwatch and began a brief countdown. “Five… four… three… two… one…” Just on schedule, about a thousand armed men calmly walked into view.
They each had an air of confidence, superiority, and unlike the previous hundred men, were in their respective flawless stances with their guns or swords.
“These men,” continued Jupiter, “actually have brains and are not nearly as expendable as the previous batch was.”
“Well, we have our own army,” declared Sarmad from behind a rock as he prepared his weaponry.
Jupiter hooted with obnoxious laughter and gave a light kick to Leo’s face, “Just watch helplessly as your friends die.” The man knew that Leo would die from his wounds in a matter of minutes, and if he himself managed to hold out for around ten minutes, then even if he would lose the fight, his enemies shall not win for they would have suffered yet another loss – first Reo and Zack and now Leo.
He would win, even if he were to die.
“Incoming!” came an unexpected shout from the sky. The group of survivors looked up to see at least a hundred men skydive from the helicopters with their parachutes, and among them was Neo.
The man had gone to the Muslim tribes as he had been instructed by Boris and had managed to convince the Muslim King to help them. While Neo himself wasn’t a Muslim, he had once saved the King’s son from drowning and had been offered lodging at the city although he politely declined. In addition his brother had participated in a few of the many battles that the Muslims had participated in and had often led them to victory.
The King was deeply moved and upset upon hearing that Reo had been indirectly murdered by Jupiter and had decided that he must help – not for revenge, but to make sure that nobody else would suffer what Reo had to go through.
Jupiter was slightly alarmed however he quickly shrugged it off and ordered his men to shoot the Muslims while they were still descending. The plan would’ve worked but Jupiter suffered another horrid shock. All three of the helicopters were capable of shooting their targets… and the Muslims took full advantage of it.
Before his own elites could shoot the descending Muslims, the latter’s helicopters shot the men and to their hatred, one shot was capable enough to destroy a hundred men and the worst thing was that four shots had been fired already, so Jupiter had only six hundred men left and the other team had two hundred, but while the former had the advantage, the latter’s helicopters were the problem.
Jupiter was brought out of his musing when he heard simultaneous screams of a hundred men. He realized that another shot from the helicopters had been fired and another hundred had died – that left him with five hundred men and more were constantly being killed by Sarmad, Boris and Calhoun. Not only that, but the Muslims had finally descended and were taking out the five hundred remaining men with incredible ease and swiftness.
“Darn,” said Jupiter to no one in particular.
“That’s right,” Jupiter turned around to see the man who had just said that – Sarmad – A man who didn’t look incredibly pleased. Jupiter raised his sword to kill the furious man, but to his astonishment the strike was blocked – Blocked by Leo’s Sabers which Sarmad appeared to be wielding.
Jupiter deduced that Sarmad had borrowed them from the unconscious Leo and it seemed that he was an expert in wielding the swords – maybe even better than the original wielder himself. Jupiter was very skilled in the art of sword fighting, probably more so than the champion back at their own timeline, but he was no match against Leo who was far too talented and hardworking to beat. And hanging out with Leo must have rubbed off on Sarmad because his handiwork with a sword was ideal and perfect. However, Jupiter noticed one weakness of Sarmad – the man had low stamina and was already breathing hard.
Sarmad noticed that Jupiter was deep in thought and was fighting using only his reflexes. He must exploit that weakness before the man could realize what he was doing. Sarmad smirked to himself as he thought of a fantastic plan. He gave a punch that was weak and sloppy on purpose and Jupiter ducked to dodge it and then gave a blow of his own.
Jupiter expected Sarmad to block or dodge it, but instead the latter used his Sabers to cut off the former’s right hand. The sadistic man experienced a whole new world of pain and screamed in agony as his cut off hand fell on the ground, filled with blood where it once used to be attached. Jupiter clutched the remains of his arm and desperately tried to prevent the blood from escaping, all the while screaming in his suffering. The blood was trying to gush out however Jupiter managed to slow it down to the point where it merely leaked out.
If he wasn’t so busy in nursing himself, he would’ve noticed that Sarmad was pointing one of his Sabers at him and then shouted, “Die you darned, fiendish monster!”
Jupiter was frozen with fear, pain and shock as the Saber dug into him and impaled him through his chest causing his shirt to darken into a crimson color and as a result, the only thing preventing him from falling down was the sword through his heart that held him there.
Sarmad felt the familiar twinge of guilt that he always felt whenever he killed somebody but he knew this was for the best. While most people were convertible to the proper good side, he knew that Jupiter was the manifestation of pure evil. He reluctantly pulled out the sword, knowing that it would kill the man who seemed to be just a shell of what he once was. Jupiter felt his death nearing and he struggled to hold out for a little longer. If he could distract Sarmad for a few more minutes then he would ultimately win against the clutches of both Sarmad and Leo. Just a few more minutes was all that he needed.
“I-it’s a pity,” he managed to croak out while coughing out blood, “I was planning to return to the original timeline and provide them with these images and then kill myself so that the world would not have to deal with the monster I am.” A bluff – that was all that he was saying. He knew all about the guilt that Sarmad always felt whenever he killed anyone and all he needed to do was keep Sarmad on his guilt-trip just for a little while. “But you’ve prevented that from happening. All I wanted was peace, but I knew that Leo was unstable and could explode, what with his difficult past and all, so I had to dispose of him.” Yet another lie – he noticed how Sarmad was looking down at his shoes in a guilty manner.
All this time, Jupiter was keeping an eye on Leo, waiting for the man to die, he could tell that he only had a few more seconds left, at the most. Sarmad finally understood what Jupiter was planning and his eyes widened in realization and fear.
“Darn you,” he said in anger as he sprinted all the way towards the hurt Leo. He quickly lifted Leo as a mother does to her child and began to beg, “Don’t die Leo. It’s going to be alright – We’ll get you medical attention.” By this time everybody from 8th Solar was dead and the Muslims were bowing down in gratefulness to their God.
“I-it was all a lie. I’ve had no such intentions to become good. I-I’ve won,” said Jupiter as his heart stopped beating, primarily because of the severe loss of blood and the fact that in his age, his body was already frail and weak although he was far stronger than most, if not all people of his age.
Boris and Neo and Calhoun gazed at Leo in despair and helplessness, each of them ignoring Jupiter – he was one man, who the world would never miss nor remember.
“S-S-Sarmad,” Leo managed to say, “I’m s-s-s-sorr-” Leo gave a smile as his body stopped moving permanently and his breathing slowed until it had stopped completely.
“Leo,” begged Sarmad, moving his friend in fear, “Leo!” No reply. Tears began to wash down Sarmad’s face as he gazed at Leo’s peaceful but unmoving face. He began to scream louder than a microphone, “LEO!”

Yes that is the end of the story, and yes it is a

Spoiler (Click to View)

cliffhanger

I'm so evil aren't I? Anyyway, please rate and review.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Good to see returning members, so welcome back ~

Anyways, I have edited your story with spoilers, so it is now easier to read. And haha, "[" brackets are used, not "{", so I fixed a couple of those too. As for the story, I skimmed through it, and it looks pretty nice. I will come back and read it in detail soon!

---

|| MyBB Code Guide || User Control Panel Guide ||

Oh thanks and about the brackets, well where I was writing these brackets were to signal italic.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

This story is not H.G. Wells approved.

H.G stands for?

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

He was a famous author who wrote a story called "The Time Machine".

He was a famous author who wrote a story called "The Time Machine".

Ah, I remember talking about that in class.
Anyways, cool story.
It's pretty good.
Especially for an 11-year-old...
Although I started writing when I was like... 8 or 9...
Anyways! Good job! KIU.

---

I Have No Idea What I'm Doing With My Life Right Now

Thanks guys. Btw chapters shall be up when I have the time however in case of my computer not working I shall stop writing until it is repaired.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

This needs Morlocks.

Where are the Morlocks?

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

This is what we all want, Brad.

I will consider it (Just kidding)

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Insomniac is right. You should add Morlocks! It's pretty good. I like it a lot, but it was kind of annoying when you didn't have the spoilers. Also, I recommend adding a poll to see how much people like it.

---

Leader of Team Sonic Dash!!!!

Signature by Luck and avatar by me.

Go to My sig and avi shop

My GFX work

My twitter

Sorry, I want to make new ideas not copy H.G's. Poll added

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

New chapter here guys very fun though.EDIT Guys please comment so I know you guys are reading.

Spoiler (Click to View)

Chapter 10
Suddenly Boris screamed, the Greek had stabbed him with his spear. It would have been a immediate death if Zack wouldn’t have pounced on him. Everyone was quiet even Giro and Ventus. Zack and the Greek fought fiercely punching each other with the Greek trying to reach his spear while Zack trying to reach his revolver. Suddenly Zack lost his footing and fell down; in an instant the Greek reached his spear and pointed it at Zack’s neck.
Bang went a gun and the man dropped his weapon and screamed in pain however he got lucky and survived. It was Leo; yes the silent, lone wolf Leo. All this was very dramatic.
“What the heck just happened?” wondered Sarmad aloud. Zack dragged himself up and Leo who had just saved Zack fell down but not before smiling.
Sarmad and Zack attempted to examine their friends but Giro put his gun next to Leo’s head.
“Not a word,” he threatened, then to one of Mike’s men “Tie them up including Boris.”
They were all tied up. Then the men said that they would leave them here and left The Greek got up nursing himself. Zack signaled him to come and asked him something in Greek.
“Το άτομο μου έδωσε αυτό για τη βοήθεια τον,” he replied holding up a mirror. Zack quickly shot another question which the man replied as well. They kept on doing this until Zack stopped.
“The man only joined our enemies for they gave him a mirror which is very rare around here,” he said, “He will willingly help us if we promise to give him ten more mirrors later. The story of the man in Shark’s Teeth is true, though and he will help us to get there if we give him ten more mirrors which if we return home I shall come back and give them to him. About Leo who is currently being tortured by them…” At this point they heard a scream of Leo. “Leo, pity we can’t do any thing, or can we? “Well Leo it seems did not believe this man so he slipped out to check on the prisoners who had escaped thanks to the Greek. Well the men made a deal with the Greek and gave him a mirror and asked his to trick you which he accepted, regretfully. Our enemy bumped with Leo who tried to fight back but was outnumbered. He was hit in the head with a rock which was laying there.” Suddenly they heard another scream from Leo. Zack muttered something in Greek to the Greek who untied their knots.
“Boris, will you be able to fight?” asked Sarmad with concern.
“What? It was just a spear that wasn’t even sharpened,” replied Boris with confidence and a laugh. “I tell you Zack and Sarmad I am going to help our country and get those photos.”

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Chapter 11 is here but please comment so I know you guys are reading.

Spoiler (Click to View)

Chapter 11
The screaming continued and it was horrible to listen to. They tried to figure out where the screaming was coming from and finally found out that it was coming from straight ahead where the Time Machine was. Zack and the Greek began to talk loudly in Greek about the ways people of this time lived.
“Silence!” commanded Boris, “Bunch of fools. They all became silent. Suddenly they saw Leo, tied to a tree with Giro and Ventus asking him question to which he would reply with a insult. After that they would punch him and do all types of horrible things which I shall not describe. Sarmad lifted his revolver.
“I am sick of them,” he said grimly and fired at the chest of Ventus who immediately fell down, dead. It was a direct hit. All the blood started to flow out. Giro looked behind and was shocked to see the party of people holding either a gun or a spear. Giro was a very tough person and was never scared of anything but at that time he had turned white after seeing his not only his partner but also friend killed by Sarmad.
“Ven,” he yelled. No reply, “Ven.” Then he started to curse Sarmad under his breath.
“I will spare you, Giro, but if I get my eyes on you doing terrible things, I promise you one way or another I will kill you,” said Sarmad. Giro simply got up lifted Venus and with great difficulty began dragging him away. Suddenly Mike’s men came out of nowhere and saw the scene. Sarmad gave a smirk and signaled his friends who lifted their weapons and attacked Mike’s men. Giro did not take part in it but simply dragged Ventus away. Everyone screaming and fighting each other however some of Mike’s men were not armed so they took some rocks or branches and fought using them. In the hullabaloo Sarmad sneaked to where Leo was.
“Are you alright? Can you fight,” he asked Leo.
“No and no,” replied Leo weakly. Sarmad untied his knots and took him to a corner.
“You may need this,” he said giving him a gun and then leaving him but when he came to the fight he saw a dreadful sight. Bodies were lying down all over and among those bodies was Boris’s. The only people standing apart from him were the Greek, Zack and three of Mike’s men two of which were using branches as their weapon. Sarmad blinded by rage and frustration did not notice another of Mike’ men sneak behind him with a branch, about to attack him.
“Die, Sarmad,” he yelled about to strike him when suddenly he fell down. It was Leo, who even though lay injured still had his burning spirit and a gun. Something struck Sarmad; Leo had changed from Sarmad’s rival to his ally to his friend. He may be silent, calm and like his own way but he was good at heart. Sarmad joined the battle field after glancing at Leo for a split second.
“Look’s like you need some help,” he said to Zack.
“About time, where were you anyway?” asked Zack. However he got no reply as the enemies shot their hands and the guns flew away.
“Σύλληψη,” yelled the Greek from a distance throwing a couple of spears at his friends who caught them.
“I bet that means “catch,”” said Sarmad to Zack. They were now standing back to back with their spears.
“Well you are right,” replied Zack and suddenly picked up a branch and threw it at the man who was using a gun as his weapon. It hit him straight in the hand and his gun flew away as well. The man howled with rage and picked up the same branch as his weapon.
“Look’s like things just got interesting,” said Zack.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Chapter 12 and 13 are here but guys please comment. If you are a writer you fell rejected if no one comments.

Spoiler (Click to View)

Chapter 12
Sarmad and Zack stood back to back surrounded by two dangerous enemies of their each holding a sharp and pointy branch. As for Sarmad and Zack, they were holding sharpened old fashioned spears. They looked rather comical, dressed as modern humans while using old fashioned spears.
“On three,” whispered Sarmad, “One, two, three, go!” They all suddenly pounced on the men bravely each of them holding their own. Close to them was the Greek, fighting using a spear against another of Mike’s men who was holding a branch. They both held their own until the enemy lost his footing. In an instant the Greek was on top of him frantically talking in Greek. Suddenly the man, whose name was Tower, kicked him while lying down. The Greek however bravely accepted the pain and continued fighting. Both of the men were soon exhausted but bravely continued occasionally stopping and taking circles, mocking each other in their own language but yet none of them stopped. Finally the two gave on final slash to each other and fell down. This match and the participants deserve a lot of respect from everyone.
Meanwhile, Sarmad was fighting another man whose name was Geo. They too held their own and would not give up, knowing the future that the loser might have to face. Geo was a skilled fighter and was a former champion in sword fighting. Sarmad might have been physically stronger but he did not have the experience that Geo had. Therefore he was in a disadvantage. Their weapons slashed against each other, equally and for some time it was equal but after a while Sarmad began to lose stamina, he tried his best not to stop but every human has a limit. Sarmad started to lose his footing of which his opponent took advantage. At last he was down, tired out.
“Guess this is my future,” he said, after which he made a small prayer. Geo as about to finish him when a roar echoed and then a few small trees collapsed for there was a dinosaur. Zack who had just killed his opponent, started to wonder why he never had seen this type of one.
“Of course,” he said. “It is undiscovered so far.”
“No time for a History lesson, Zack,” said Sarmad who had survived when Geo stopped to stare at the beast with awe. Sarmad had taken the opportunity to strike him, after which Geo died.
“We got to get out of here,” he added. They both started to run, towards the Time Machine to take shelter, Sarmad picked up the Greek and Leo. Zack hesitantly carried Tower and Boris. The dinosaur was not that large and was green in color. It had a couple of horns in its head which was rather large for a small body. The beast’s tail was as large as its head with a sort of plate in the end. All in all it was a most comical looking creature. The men who had reached the Time Machine stared in awe as it saw a rabbit but did not kill or harm it. Rather it went near a tree and stood up on its hind legs and chewed the leaves, hungrily.
“It’s a Herbivore!” exclaimed Zack. He went outside and took many pictures with Leo’s camera after turning off flash, knowing that it might be scared of sudden light. The dinosaur ignored Zack and continued to chew the leaves.
“Hey, Zack we have a situation here, remember,” called Sarmad, coming out of the Time Machine without Tower, Leo or the Greek.
“Sarmad,” said Zack facing him. Why did we come here? Sarmad paused. It was true originally they had come for pictures not for a vacation.
“Sorry, Zack,” apologized Sarmad to which Zack replied with a laugh.
“No need for an apology, I may be a future professor but I am not sensitive,” he replied.
“Look who’s talking, the guy who got all angry when I accused him of siding with our enemies,” replied Sarmad also with a laugh.
“Fun time is over, Sarmad” said Zack turning serious, “go get some fire wood so the Greek can wake up and we can go to Shark’s Teeth. Sarmad put on a face but left to collect firewood.
Sarmad wondered what Zack would do; perhaps he would have a doze. But Sarmad was wrong, Zack started to collect fruits, nuts and anything edible he could find. He was sure that Leo, The Greek, Sarmad, Tower if he would behave himself and Boris if he survived, deserved a treat. He would give them all a grand surprise. While collecting the food he started to gaze at the dinosaur. He saw a rabbit near by and immediately shot it and began to skin it. He soon did it and took out a lighter from his pocket.
Guess it will have to do, he thought. He roasted the rabbit with it. Zack went to a near by river and put some water in everyone’s bottles and in a glass to wash the fruit with. He smiled and soon washed the fruit, wondering where Sarmad was with the firewood. An hour passed and he began to worry. He waited even more but Sarmad didn’t return.

Chapter 12

Spoiler (Click to View)

Zack was sick of waiting, as he was a soon to be scientist, like all of them, he was a very impatient person. He cursed and yelled and scolded himself for telling Sarmad to go alone. He wrote a note on a piece of paper and this is what he wrote,

Dear Sarmad
I have gone to look for you as you have not come, yet. However if you come, safely without any harm, flash my torch up in the sky if it is night, and if it is day climb a tree and wave a flag or something.

P.S Do NOT go into the Time Machine, please, Sarmad, I am trusting you.


Zack


Zack placed the note under a rock which he had painted red so Sarmad could find it. Zack walked towards the jungle, silently. It was more of a swamp than a jungle. Vines and roots were on the ground and the branches were covering all sunlight. But Zack had grown up in a village and he worked very hard to become Boris’s assistant. He knew how hard life could be and therefore did not whine. Soon it was night but the jungle remained the same as no sunlight had entered earlier. Suddenly Zack heard a groan, a deep, painful groan. The groaning continued. Zack followed the noise and suddenly found someone or something on the ground covered with leaves, water and mud.
“I am a monster!” cried the thing.
“Right, and I’m your mom,” replied Zack, rubbing the leaves and mud away. Out came the face of Sarmad.
“What happened?” asked Zack.
“A monster came and did this to me,” replied Sarmad, smiling.
“Jokes aside,” said Zack sternly.
“I fell down and twisted my ankle,” replied Sarmad, still with a smile though he was injured. Suddenly the two of them noticed a torch flashing from the Time Machine. Zack quickly explained to Sarmad about the note but not about the food. He also noticed a few logs of firewood.
“Nice,” he said, picking them up. They both went towards the Time Machine after Zack loaded his gun. When they arrived they saw a figure creeping in the shadows.
“Freeze!” cried Zack, dropping the wood, “show yourself.”
The person who came out surprised the both of them. It was the barely alive, hard working professor, Boris.

By the way I am taking a break because I might be participating in a writing tournament in THIS WEBSITE but if I do not I will still be writing here.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Wow, this hasn't had a comment in a while. Anyway, it's doing better. I like it.

---

Leader of Team Sonic Dash!!!!

Signature by Luck and avatar by me.

Go to My sig and avi shop

My GFX work

My twitter

Yup I did'nt get a spot for the tournament so...

Spoiler (Click to View)

Chapter 14
“Don’t worry I am the one who signaled with that torch,” he said. “By the way Leo and the Greek are awake, they are fresh and well.”
“Did they eat anything?” asked Zack, anxiously. Boris shook his head.
”Hey,” said a voice from a distance. It was Leo and the Greek coming closer.
Zack asked them to shut their eyes, while taking them to the Time Machine. He quickly took out his collection of fruits, rabbits and everything else he collected. He asked his friends to open their eyes. They were shocked and asked him questions.
“What is all this?”
“How did you get this?”
“Is it for us?”
“Thanks, Zack” said Sarmad, gratefully, “now I understand why you sent me off.
Soon they were sitting by a camp fire, eating the rabbit and fruit.
“Tomorrow we leave for Shark’s Teeth,” said Zack after telling them his side of the story. Everyone agreed and grinned. They all listened to the Greek about this time, how people lived, ate, fought, entertain themselves. The Greek told them in a very funny way, acting out every scene, making everyone laugh out loud. All of a sudden they heard people singing songs. Zack asked the Greek what it was. The Greek replied in his own language that it was a circus.
Therefore the men ignored the songs.
After finishing every crumb of food and every drop of water they all fell asleep without even knowing. Sarmad dozed off first, tired out by his search of firewood. Next was Zack who tried to stay awake but couldn’t do so. After him was the professor, Boris. Last was the silent Leo who was thinking about Giro and Ventus who after he fell asleep joined him in his strange dreams.
A few hours later Leo woke up. He had had his rest. Gazing at the sleeping men, he got up. Unable to curb his desire of running to stay fit; he went outside and jogged. He made quiet some noise however tied out his allies did not wake up. Rather they fell into a deeper sleep. After a few hours he stopped. All of a sudden light came out of nowhere and in a few minutes a blazing ball of light could be seen.
“Looks like someone is up early,” said Boris coming out of the Time Machine. Leo remained silent. Knowing Leo was not in the rare mood for talk; Boris took no further notice of him. After a while the others also woke up.
“Can’t believe I slept first, I usually sleep last. Must’ve been tired by looking for that firewood. You have any food left Zack? No? Oh well that’s just great,” grumbled Sarmad. “I say, where’s Leo?”
His question was answered that moment for Leo came to the Time Machine. He was holding a giant of a fish, weighing a lot. He threw it at Zack who cooked it.
Good old Leo, thought Sarmad, eating the fish, hungrily. Leo himself barely ate anything.
“Say, what about the Time Machine?” asked Sarmad. “We can’t carry it with us.
“Sure we can,” answered Boris with a smirk. He took out a small box and opened it. Immediately like magic the Machine disappeared. “It’s called technology.”
“Nice,” said Sarmad and Zack together, amazed.

Chapter 15
In a few hours they had taken useful things and burnt the useless things. The men left Tower on the ground, not able to think of any other thing to do to the poor man. They each had to carry luggage. Everything except for the guns went in the bags. The luggage consisted of a fishing hook, leftover beans and nuts, Water, the Time Machine box, important papers of Boris and Zack, a couple of torches and a camera. The papers took a lot of place and Sarmad insisted on burning them too but Boris and his assistant would not budge. Soon they were ready to go. The Greek was leading them as he alone knew the location of Shark’s Teeth. Walking slowly, Sarmad remembered how he used to believe that the Time Machine would not work. How he sneered at Boris, laughing when he was working, taunting his Time Machine, begging him to stop wasting his time. Guess I owe Boris an apology, thought Sarmad.
Gradually the sun set took place and they took shelter in a dark cave. It was thrilling to them but most people would have rather been frightened. Boris took out a bright torch and a sheaf of his papers and began to examine them. Leo remained silent wondering what had happened to Giro. Zack thought of Shark’s Teeth and how they would get there. The Greek practiced with his sword determined to do whatever he could to help his new friends. Sarmad wondered how the other man from the future on Shark’s Teeth came to this time.
“Someone will be put on watch, in case,” said Boris, suddenly.
“I’ll take the first turn and will wake Zack up by two. He will watch until four and then wake up Boris who at six will wake up Leo. By seven Leo will wake us all up,” said Sarmad. Everyone agreed and fell asleep. Sarmad loaded his gun and got it ready in case someone comes. He heard rabbits having a meeting outside the cave. Later he heard a dinosaur’s roar.
A while later at two’ O clock, he woke up Zack. Though Zack did not want to wake up, Sarmad threatened him with a glass of water.
On Zack’s watch nothing happened and he just stood still, wishing an intruder would come so he could have a thrill. Zack soon felt himself drifting to sleep but he just managed to prevent that disaster could happen. Without a doubt, he would be fired by Boris if that happened. Time passed gradually but eventually it was four. He woke up Boris who immediately woke up.
Zack soon fell asleep and was soon breathing heavily which annoyed Boris, greatly. Boris considered working on his documents but changed his mind. Nothing happened in Boris’s watch as well. As soon his watch hit six, he woke up Leo who silently got up. Before Boris slept he saw the beautiful red ball, the Sun rise. Leo sat on the floor instead of standing and kept his eyes glued on the cave entrance. It seemed time passed quickly and by seven he woke up his allies.

Guys please comment as I said it is very hard to write thinking no one is reading it.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

As far as I can tell with chapter 11, it looks like you have a few grammar and spelling mistakes. For example, there were a few un-ended quotations ("blah blah. <-Missing end quote here) and some places where you put periods instead of a comma, which would have worked better.
The next thing I guess is dialogue tags. It looks like every single one is "Said" (exaggeration, of course, but still). I think you used replied once, and that's definitely in the right direction. Anything from shrieked, yelled, laughed, cursed, bellowed...any of those will work. You;d be surprised how much a dialogue tag can improve your sentence. Something that looks like a boring statement by a character turns into a spine chilling howl, etc.
Lastly, I think you need to expand your sentences more. When you describe a scene, really take your time to do it. For example:
1. The screaming continued and it was horrible to listen to. They tried to figure out where the screaming was coming from and finally found out that it was coming from straight ahead where the Time Machine was. Zack and the Greek began to talk loudly in Greek about the ways people of this time lived.

2. The screaming wound on and on, and it was horrible to listen to. Zach and the Greek had to cover their ears and howl back, just to fight the gut-wrenching noise coming from far away. Zach perked his ears and braved the noise, deciding it was time to figure out who - or what- was howling so bitterly. "There!" he shouted, and pointed to where the time machine was. Zack and the Greek began to talk loudly in Greek, but he couldn't make out much of what they were saying. He figured it pertained to the time machine, about the ways people of this time lived. The screaming churned his blood, and a chill worked its way down his tingly spine. -Or something like that.

Sentence two is better, because it elaborates on all of the key points of that paragraph. It really puts the reader into the situation and allows him to see what you're visualizing. The more you add, the better the reader can see the picture. It's like painting a picture: with just a few brush strokes [words], you get a tree with a bird. With a few hundred, you get a deciduous tree with beautiful leaves falling all around it, as a dove soars through the frosty air.

If there's anything else you'd like me to review, don't hesitate to ask

---

"Life isn't about how hard you can hit;
it's about how hard you can get hit, and keep moving forward"
{[YT]} [|BEYBLOG|] (â—ŠSoG-My Bookâ—Š)/<DA>\

Okay thank you Sparta however I will not of course change the paragraph of the screaming as I do not want a single word taken from other where. I will use the advise you gave me in future paragraphs. Thank you very much.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

I do not know why two people voted that I have "the worst story ever," One of them has no reason, saying that he never voted on my story. The other hasn't replied yet. Oh well new chapter.

Spoiler (Click to View)

Chapter 16
Sarmad woke up first, being fresh. After him with groans his friends woke up. He and Leo went outside, enjoying the beautiful day. They heard birds chirping, gracefully. All sorts of birds descended to the ground, near Sarmad and gazed at them, chirping with sheer happiness. A robin with an extremely red breast actually perched on his shoulder. Sarmad liked this very much.
He had the pleasure of giving them a fruit which he had taken from a tree. A parrot got a guava from a tree and came to Leo and gave it to him. Leo picked up the fruit.
“I like fruit,” he confessed, “thanks little guy.”
A loud noise frightened all the birds away. Leo turned around, calmly and he saw a flying, pink dinosaur with a very yellow beak. It howled again and again, painfully. That was when Leo saw that it was being hunted by a land dinosaur.
The dinosaur was a tall one, standing on its hind legs, roaring loudly making everything afraid. It was brown with horns on its large head; a grey tail was following it but it was a sight to see. However ugly it was, it was a rare sight to see. The brute continued to roar, attempting to catch its prey.
Leo and Sarmad realized that the poor dinosaur who was being hunted, had one of its wings broken and so could not fly higher than it was. The dangerous anger that resided within Leo had now taken control of him. Taking out his gun, he aimed at the brute’s ugly chest.
“Do it, Leo,” yelled his friends coming out. Leo looked at them, gave a sadistic smile and fired. Thankfully it was a direct hit and the beast immediately died on the spot. The prey realized it was safe and so slowly flew away as it was still injured.
The robin and parrot returned but the rest of the birds were still too frightened to come out.
“Nice bird, Leo,” teased Zack. “Never knew you liked birds.”
Leo gave him a look and Zack became quiet.
Why can’t Leo be the funny and jolly one? He thought
“The bags are ready,” said Boris, “everyone go and get your own. We are leaving.”
The robin and parrot did not go, rather they stayed at their perhaps new owner’s shoulder.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Those haters who did that shouldn't put you down...Instead, it should motivate you to do even better! Your story is really good, juts that you need a bit more description on where they are what's happening and why, so it builds up a picture in your head as to what's going on. Apart from that, really well done!

---

Current tournament placings:
Freeze-Fest - 3rd!

Thanks Herculeo. Currently I am in a tournament of Writing by Kyouya so will not be able to write chapters.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Guys I have lost my inspiration of writing. My cousin told me this happens to many writers when they feel their story doesn't get much Appreciation, therefore I am taking a hiatius from writing. However I can promise all of the people who commented on The Time Machine, I will return. This is my first story. As soon as I feel my blood boling i will start to write. I double posted because I thought this is an anouncement that should be written in a new post.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...

Sorry for triple post but I feel that what I'm about to say needs to be in a fresh post.

I'M BACK.

Yes, I'm not dead, and I have hereby completed the story with edits, far and wide, so all those who haven't read it, please do.
For more details please refer to the first post and don't hesitate to PM me if you need anything or have a question about the story.

---

Spoiler (Click to View)

Please call me Roxas. I love to write stories.

http://worldbeyblade.org/Thread-The-Time-Machine-Story
I am not on Black and White right now. But I am considering my greatly hyped return...